Onkyo Pr Sc885 Users Manual SC885_En

Onkyo-Pr-Sc885P-Owner-S-Manual onkyo-pr-sc885p-owner-s-manual

Onkyo-Pr-Sc885-Owner-S-Manual onkyo-pr-sc885-owner-s-manual

PR-SC885 to the manual 94b04901-b199-434b-8436-e1cbc815a8ff

2015-01-24

: Onkyo Onkyo-Pr-Sc885-Users-Manual-233091 onkyo-pr-sc885-users-manual-233091 onkyo pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 128

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

PR-SC885_En.book Page 1 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Contents
Introduction ..................................... 2

AV Controller

PR-SC885

Connection .................................... 19

Turning On & First Time Setup..... 43

Instruction Manual

Basic Operation
Playing your AV components ....... 57
Listening to the Radio .................. 58

Enjoying the Listening Modes ..... 79

Thank you for purchasing an Onkyo AV controller.
Please read this manual thoroughly before making
connections and plugging in the unit.
Following the instructions in this manual will enable
you to obtain optimum performance and listening
enjoyment from your new AV controller.
Please retain this manual for future reference.

Advanced Operation ..................... 94

Troubleshooting .......................... 121

PR-SC885_En.book Page 2 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS
TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

CAUTION:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO
USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER
SERVICING
TO
QUALIFIED
SERVICE
PERSONNEL.

WARNING

AVIS

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE
NE PAS OUVRIR

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within
the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying the appliance.

Important Safety Instructions
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

10.

11.
12.

13.
14.

Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus
(including amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two
blades with one wider than the other. A grounding
type plug has two blades and a third grounding
prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not
fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being walked on or
pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
Use only with the cart, stand, PORTABLE CART WARNING
tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or
sold with the apparatus.
When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/
apparatus combination to
avoid injury from tip-over.
S3125A
Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or
when unused for long periods of time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been
damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or
plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has
been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate
normally, or has been dropped.

15. Damage Requiring Service
Unplug the apparatus from the wall outlet and refer
servicing to qualified service personnel under the
following conditions:
A. When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,
B. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen
into the apparatus,
C. If the apparatus has been exposed to rain or
water,
D. If the apparatus does not operate normally by
following the operating instructions. Adjust only
those controls that are covered by the operating
instructions as an improper adjustment of other
controls may result in damage and will often
require extensive work by a qualified technician
to restore the apparatus to its normal operation,
E. If the apparatus has been dropped or damaged in
any way, and
F. When the apparatus exhibits a distinct change in
performance this indicates a need for service.
16. Object and Liquid Entry
Never push objects of any kind into the apparatus
through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a
fire or electric shock.
The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or
splashing and no objects filled with liquids, such as
vases shall be placed on the apparatus.
Don’t put candles or other burning objects on top of
this unit.
17. Batteries
Always consider the environmental issues and follow local regulations when disposing of batteries.
18. If you install the apparatus in a built-in installation,
such as a bookcase or rack, ensure that there is adequate ventilation.
Leave 20 cm (8") of free space at the top and sides
and 10 cm (4") at the rear. The rear edge of the shelf
or board above the apparatus shall be set 10 cm (4")
away from the rear panel or wall, creating a flue-like
gap for warm air to escape.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 3 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Precautions
1. Recording Copyright—Unless it’s for personal use
only, recording copyrighted material is illegal without the permission of the copyright holder.
2. AC Fuse—The AC fuse inside the unit is not userserviceable. If you cannot turn on the unit, contact
the dealer from whom you purchased this unit.
3. Care—Occasionally you should dust the unit all
over with a soft cloth. For stubborn stains, use a soft
cloth dampened with a weak solution of mild detergent and water. Dry the unit immediately afterwards
with a clean cloth. Don’t use abrasive cloths, thinners, alcohol, or other chemical solvents, because
they may damage the finish or remove the panel lettering.
4. Power
WARNING
BEFORE PLUGGING IN THE UNIT FOR THE
FIRST TIME, READ THE FOLLOWING SECTION CAREFULLY.
AC outlet voltages vary from country to country.
Make sure that the voltage in your area meets the
voltage requirements printed on the unit’s rear panel
(e.g., AC 230 V, 50 Hz or AC 120 V, 60 Hz).
The power cord plug is used to disconnect this unit
from the AC power source. Make sure that the plug
is readily operable (easily accessible) at all times.

For North American model
Pressing the [STANDBY/ON] button to select
Standby mode does not fully shutdown the unit. If
you do not intend to use the unit for an extended
period, remove the power cord from the AC outlet.
5. Never Touch this Unit with Wet Hands—Never
handle this unit or its power cord while your hands
are wet or damp. If water or any other liquid gets
inside this unit, have it checked by the dealer from
whom you purchased this unit.
6. Handling Notes
• If you need to transport this unit, use the original
packaging to pack it how it was when you originally bought it.
• Do not leave rubber or plastic items on this unit
for a long time, because they may leave marks on
the case.
• This unit’s top and rear panels may get warm
after prolonged use. This is normal.
• If you do not use this unit for a long time, it may
not work properly the next time you turn it on, so
be sure to use it occasionally.

For U.S. models
FCC Information for User

CAUTION:
The user changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by
one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

For Canadian Models
NOTE: THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS
COMPLIES WITH CANADIAN ICES-003.
For models having a power cord with a polarized plug:
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK,
MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT,
FULLY INSERT.

Modèle canadien
REMARQUE: CET APPAREIL NUMÉRIQUE DE
LA CLASSE B EST CONFORME À LA NORME
NMB-003 DU CANADA.
Sur les modèles dont la fiche est polarisée:
ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS
LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER
JUSQU’AU FOND.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 4 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Features
Processing
THX*1

•
Surround EX
• THX Ultra2*1 certified
• Dolby*2 Digital, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital
Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Pro Logic IIx
• DTS*3, DTS-ES Discrete, DTS-ES Matrix, DTS-HD
Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution, DTS 96/24,
DTS Neo:6
• Neural Surround*4, THX-Neural
• Theater-Dimensional*5 virtual surround sound
• DSD Direct
• 192 kHz/24-bit D/A converters
• Powerful and highly accurate 32-bit DSP processing
• Re-EQ*6 function
• Tone control on all channels (7.1)
• 15-band EQ on 7 channels, 5-band EQ on subwoofer

Others
•
•
•
•
•

THX and Ultra2 are trademarks of THX Ltd. THX may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved. Surround EX
is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories. Used with permission.
*2
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories.

Audio/Video
• Balanced XLR stereo input
• Balanced XLR 7.1-channel preouts, with front biamping capability
• Zone 2 with level, tone, balance, and left, right, and
subwoofer pre outs, and composite video output, and
component video output (assignable).
• Zone 3 with level, balance, and left, right, and subwoofer pre outs
• 4 HDMI*7 inputs, 2 outputs (Version 1.3a)
• HDMI upconversion of composite video, S-Video,
and component sources (720p, 1080i, 1080p capable)
• Component video upconversion of composite video
and S-Video sources
• Composite video to S-Video and S-Video to composite video conversion
• 6 digital inputs (3 optical, 3 coaxial), 1 output (optical)
• 3 component video inputs, 2 outputs
• 6 S-Video inputs, 2 outputs
• RS-232 control
• Color-coded, assignable 7.1 multichannel input
• 7.1-channel pre out (RCA)

Audyssey MultEQ XT room correction*11
Easy-to-use onscreen setup menus
IR IN A/B and OUT
12V TRIGGER OUT A, B, C
Preprogrammed remote controller for use with other
AV components, with Learning and Macro functions

*3
“DTS” is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc., and “DTS-HD
Master Audio” is a trademark of DTS, Inc.
*4
Neural Surround is a trademark owned by Neural Audio Corporation, THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.
*5
Theater-Dimensional is a trademark of Onkyo Corporation.
*6 Re-Equalization and the “Re-EQ” logo are trademarks of THX
Ltd.
*7
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.
*8
XM Ready® is a trademark of XM Satellite Radio Inc. ©2005
XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved.

Tuner
• XM*8 Satellite Radio ready
* XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock required; sold separately.
• SIRIUS*9 Satellite Radio ready

•
•
•
•

* SiriusConnect Home tuner kit required; sold separately.
HD Radio*10 reception

40 AM/FM/SIRIUS/XM presets
AM/FM auto tuning
Direct tuning

*9
©2005 SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc. “SIRIUS,” SiriusConnect,
the SIRIUS dog logo, channel names and logos are trademarks
of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc. Available only in the contiguous
United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 5 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Features—Continued

Supplied Accessories
Make sure you have the following accessories:

*10
HD Radio™ Technology Manufactured Under License From
iBiquity Digital Corporation. “iBiquity Digital” and the “HD
Radio” and “HD” Symbols are registered trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corporation. “HD Radio” is a trademark of iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents.

Remote controller and three batteries (AA/R6)

*11
Manufactured under license from Audyssey Laboratories. U.S.
and foreign patents pending. Audyssey MultEQ XT is a trademark of Audyssey Laboratories.

Speaker setup microphone

THX Ultra2
Before any home theater component can be THX
Ultra2 certified, it must pass a rigorous series of
quality and performance tests. Only then can a product feature the THX Ultra2 logo, which is your guarantee that the Home Theater products you purchase
will give you superb performance for many years to
come. THX Ultra2 requirements define hundreds of
parameters, including power amplifier performance,
and pre-amplifier performance and operation for
both digital and analog domains. THX Ultra2 receivers also feature proprietary THX technologies (e.g.,
THX Mode) which accurately translate movie
soundtracks for home theater playback.
*

“Xantech” is a registered trademark of Xantech Corporation.

“Niles” is a registered trademark of Niles Audio Corporation.

Apple and iPod are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright
protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and
other limited consumer uses only unless otherwise
authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.

Indoor FM antenna

AM loop antenna

Power cord
(Power cord varies from country to country.)
*

In catalogs and on packaging, the letter at the end of the product
name indicates the color. Specifications and operation are the same
regardless of color.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 6 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Multiroom Capability
You can use three speaker systems with this AV controller—a surround-sound speaker system (up to 7.1 channels)
in your main listening room, a stereo speaker system in a second room, or Zone 2, as we call it, and another stereo
speaker system in a third room that we call Zone 3. And, you can select a different audio source for each room.
Main Room: In your main listening room, you can enjoy up to 7.1-channel playback (see pages 19–23).
You can enjoy the various listening modes such as Dolby, DTS, and THX (pages 79–86).
Zone 2: In your Zone 2 room, you can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback and video playback (see page 109).
*The listening modes cannot be used with Zone 2 and Zone 3.
*External power amplifier required.
Zone 3: In your Zone 3 room, you can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback (see page 110).
*The listening modes cannot be used with Zone 2 and Zone 3.
*External power amplifier required.

Main Room
Surround back left and right
speakers
Front left and right speakers

Subwoofer
Center speaker

Surround left and right speakers

Zone 2 Room

Left and right
stereo speakers

Zone 3 Room

Left and right
stereo speakers

PR-SC885_En.book Page 7 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Contents
Features ............................................................ 4
Supplied Accessories ...................................... 5
Multiroom Capability ........................................ 6
Getting to Know the AV Controller ................. 8
Front Panel ...................................................................8
Display .......................................................................10
Rear Panel ..................................................................11

Remote Controller .......................................... 13
Installing the Batteries ...............................................13
Using the Remote Controller .....................................13
About the Remote Controller Modes .........................14
RECEIVER/TAPE Mode ...........................................14
DVD Mode .................................................................16
CD/MD/CDR Modes .................................................17
DOCK Mode ..............................................................18

Connecting a Power Amplifier
and Speakers .................................................. 19
Enjoying Home Theater .............................................19
Connecting Your Speakers ........................................20
Connecting a Power Amplifier with RCA Inputs ......21
Connecting a Power Amplifier with XLR Inputs ......22
Bi-amping the Front Speakers ...................................23

Connecting Antennas .................................... 24

Playing Your AV Components .......................57
Basic AV Controller Operation ................................. 57

Listening to the Radio ....................................58
Listening to AM/FM Stations .................................... 58
Listening to HD Radio™ Stations ............................. 60
Listening to XM Satellite Radio® .............................. 62
Listening to SIRIUS Satellite Radio® ........................ 67
Presetting AM, FM, XM, and SIRIUS Stations ........75

Common Functions ........................................76
Setting the Display Brightness ................................... 76
Adjusting Speaker Levels .......................................... 76
Muting the AV Controller ......................................... 76
Using the Sleep Timer ............................................... 77
Using Headphones ..................................................... 77
Displaying Source Information .................................. 77
Selecting Audio Inputs .............................................. 78
Specifying the Digital Signal Format ........................ 78

Using the Listening Modes ............................79
Selecting the Listening Modes ................................... 79
Listening Modes Available for
Each Source Format ................................................ 80
About the Listening Modes ....................................... 84

Recording ........................................................87
Recording the Input Source ....................................... 87
Recording from Different AV Sources ...................... 87

Connecting the Indoor FM Antenna ..........................24
Connecting the AM Loop Antenna ............................24
Connecting an Outdoor FM Antenna .........................25
Connecting an Outdoor AM Antenna ........................25

Onscreen Setup Menus ..................................88

Connecting Your Components ..................... 26

Adjusting the Listening Modes .....................89

About AV Connections ..............................................26
Connecting Audio and Video Signals to the AV
Controller ................................................................27
Which Connections Should I Use? ............................27
Connecting a TV or Projector ....................................29
Connecting a DVD player ..........................................30
Connecting a VCR or DVR for Playback ..................32
Connecting a VCR or DVR for Recording ................33
Connecting a Satellite, Cable, or Terrestrial
Set-top box or Other Video Source .........................34
Connecting Components with HDMI ........................35
Connecting a Game Console ......................................37
Connecting a Camcorder or Other AV Component ...38
Connecting a CD Player .............................................39
Connecting a Turntable ..............................................39
Connecting a Cassette, CDR, MiniDisc, or DAT
Recorder ..................................................................40
Connecting a Balanced Audio Source .......................40
Connecting an RI Dock ..............................................41
Connecting the Power Cords of Other Components ...41
Connecting Onkyo
Components ........................42
Connecting the Power Cord .......................................42

Turning On the AV Controller ....................... 43
Turning On and Standby ............................................43

First Time Setup ............................................. 44
Speaker Settings .........................................................44
HDMI Monitor Setup .................................................45
HDMI Input Setup .....................................................47
Component Video Input Setup ...................................48
Changing the Input Display .......................................49
Digital Input Setup .....................................................49
Analog Input Setup ....................................................51
Automatic Speaker Setup (Audyssey MultEQ XT) ...52

Menu Map .................................................................. 88
Using the Re-EQ Function ......................................... 89
Using the Late Night Function .................................. 89
Audio Adjust .............................................................. 90
Listening Mode Presets .............................................. 92

Advanced Setup ..............................................94
Speaker Setup ............................................................ 94
Source Setup ............................................................ 101
Miscellaneous Setup ................................................ 104
Hardware Setup ....................................................... 106
Lock Setup ............................................................... 108

Zone 2 and Zone 3 ........................................109
Connecting Zone 2 ................................................... 109
Connecting Zone 3 ................................................... 110
Zone 2/Zone 3 Out Settings ..................................... 111
Using Zone 2 and Zone 3 ......................................... 111
Using the 12V Triggers ........................................... 114
Using the Remote Controller in Zone 2/3
and Multiroom Control Kits .................................. 115

Controlling Other Components ...................116
Entering Remote Control Codes .............................. 116
Resetting the Remote Controller ............................. 117
Learning Commands ................................................ 119
Using Macros ........................................................... 120

Troubleshooting ...........................................121
Specifications ...............................................124

PR-SC885_En.book Page 8 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Getting to Know the AV Controller
Front Panel
1

2 3 4 5

MASTER VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

STANDBY
ZONE 2
ZONE 3

PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 1

AUX 2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

Front flap

Push here to open
the flap

The actual front panel has various logos printed on it. They are not shown here for clarity.
For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.

A STANDBY/ON button (43)
Sets the AV controller to On or Standby.

B STANDBY indicator (43)
Lights up when the AV controller is on Standby and
flashes while a signal is being received from the
remote controller.

C ZONE 2 indicator (111)
Flashes when Zone 2 is being set. Lights up when
Zone 2 is on.

D ZONE 3 indicator (111)
Flashes when Zone 3 is being set. Lights up when
Zone 3 is on.

E Remote-control sensor (13)
Receives control signals from the remote controller.

F Display
See “Display” on page 10.

G DISPLAY button (77)
Displays various information about the currently
selected input source.

H MASTER VOLUME control (57)
Sets the volume of the AV controller to –∞ dB,
–81.5 dB, –81.0 dB through +18.0 dB (relative display).
The volume level can also be displayed as an absolute value. See “Volume Setup” on page 104.

I PURE AUDIO button and indicator (79)
Selects the Pure Audio listening mode. The indicator lights up when this mode is selected. Pressing
this button again selects the previous listening
mode.

J AUDIO SEL button (78)
Selects the audio input: analog, digital, HDMI, or
multichannel.

K Input selector buttons (57)
Select the following input sources: DVD,
VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV, AUX 1, AUX 2,
TAPE, TUNER, CD, PHONO.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 9 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Getting to Know the AV Controller—Continued
L

M NO P QR STU V W

Z
PUSH TO OPEN

ZONE 2

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

STEREO

TUNING

THX

PHONES

DIMMER

MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

RETURN

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

SETUP
PRESET

CLEAR
DIGITAL INPUT

ZONE 3

LISTENING MODE
TUNING

ENTER

S VIDEO

VIDEO

L AUDIO R

DIGITAL

L PHONES jack (77)
This 1/4-inch phone jack is for connecting a standard pair of stereo headphones for private listening.

M ZONE 2, ZONE 3, and OFF buttons (112)
The ZONE 2 button is used when setting Zone 2.
The ZONE 3 button is used when setting Zone 3.
The OFF button is used to turn off Zone 2 or
Zone 3.

N LEVEL button (112)
Used when adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or
Zone 3.

O TONE button (113)
Used to adjust the tone (bass and treble).

P HDMI OUT (46)
Used to set the HDMI Monitor setting.

Q STEREO button (79)
Selects the Stereo listening mode.

X RETURN button
Selects the previously displayed onscreen setup
menu.

Y SETUP MIC (52)
The automatic speaker setup microphone connects
here.

Z AUX 2 INPUT (38, 87)
Used to connect a camcorder, game console, and so
on. There are input jacks for optical digital audio,
S-Video, composite video, and analog audio.

a Up [ ] and Down [ ] buttons (90, 112)
Used to adjust the tone, and the volume and balance
of Zone 2 and Zone 3.

b DIGITAL INPUT button (50)
Used to assign digital inputs to input selectors.

c LISTENING MODE [ ]/[ ] buttons (79)
Select the listening modes.

R THX button (79)
Selects the THX listening modes.

S DIMMER button (76)
Adjusts the display brightness.

T MEMORY button (75)
Used when storing or deleting radio presets.

U TUNING MODE button (58)
Selects the Auto or Manual tuning mode for AM
and FM radio.

V SETUP button
Opens and closes the onscreen setup menus, which
are displayed on the connected TV.

W TUNING, PRESET, Arrow, and ENTER
buttons
When AM or FM is selected, the TUNING [ ]
[ ] buttons are used for radio tuning, and the PRESET [ ] [ ] buttons are used to select radio presets (see page 75). With the onscreen setup menus,
they work as arrow buttons and are used to select
and set items. The ENTER button is also used with
the onscreen setup menus.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 10 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Getting to Know the AV Controller—Continued
Display

For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.

1 Speaker/channel indicators (84)
Indicate the speaker configuration and channels
used by the current input source.
–

: A box is displayed for each speaker that’s set
in the Speaker Configuration. No box appears for
speakers that are set to No or None.
The following abbreviations indicate which audio
channels are included in the current input signal.

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

FL: Front left
C: Center
FR: Front right
SL: Surround left
LFE: Subwoofer (Low Frequency Effects)
SR: Surround right
SBL: Surround back left
SB: Surround back
SBR: Surround back right

2 Listening mode and format indicators (79)
Show the selected listening mode and audio input
signal format.

3 Tuning indicators (58)
HD (60): Lights up if the current AM or FM station
supports HD Radio technology.
SPS (61): Lights up when tuned to a HD Radio
station that’s transmitting secondary multicast channels.
AUTO (58): Lights up when Auto Tuning mode is
selected for AM or FM radio. Goes off when Manual Tuning mode is selected.
TUNED (58): Lights up when tuned to a radio station.
FM STEREO (58): Lights up when tuned to a stereo FM station.

4 SLEEP indicator (77)
Lights up when the Sleep function has been set.

5 Audyssey indicator (52)
Lights up during automatic speaker setup.

6 Headphone indicator (77)
Lights up when a pair of headphones are plugged
into the PHONES jack.

7 Message area
Displays various information.

8 Audio input indicators (60, 78)
Indicate the type of audio input that’s selected as the
audio source: HDMI, ANALOG, or DIGITAL.
While a digital HD Radio transmission is being
received, the DIGITAL indicator lights up. While an
analog HD Radio transmission is being received,
the ANALOG indicator lights up.

9 Volume level (57)
Displays the volume level.

0 MUTING indicator (76)
Flashes while the AV controller is muted.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 11 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Getting to Know the AV Controller—Continued
Rear Panel
JK L

678 9

12 3 45

HDMI

AC INLET

ASSIGNABLE

IN 4

RS232

IN 3

IN 2

OUT
MAIN

IN 1

OUT
SUB

HD RADIO

XM
ETHERNET
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR

IN 2

MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT

SIRIUS

OUT 1

Y
V

REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

MONITOR
OUT V

DVD

ZONE 2
OUT

IR
A
IN

CB/PB

ANTENNA

FM
75
ZONE 2

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

IN 2

(VCR/DVR)

ZONE 3

CR/PR
S

IN 3

AC OUTLET

12V TRIGGER OUT

ASSIGNABLE

OUT

FRONT

A
SURR BACK

OUT

CENTER

SURR

B
FRONT

SW
CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK

AC 120V 60Hz
SWITCHED
120W 1A MAX.

(CBL/SAT)

OPTICAL

PHONO

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

GND

BALANCE R

TAPE
BALANCE L
MONO

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

SURR R

VCR/DVR

SUBWOOFER

DVD
CENTER

FRONT R

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH

SURR L

FRONT L

PRE OUT

SURR BACK L
Bi-AMP

PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER

IN 2
(CD)

GND

2
3

OUT
HOT

COLD

INPUT

Q R S T U V W X YZ
A

HOT

COLD

PRE OUT

ab c

REMOTE CONTROL
This
(Remote Interactive) jack can be connected to the
jack on another
-capable
Onkyo component for remote and system control.
To use
, you must make an analog audio connection (RCA) between the AV controller and the other
component, even if they are connected digitally.

B RS232
This port is for connecting the AV controller to
home automation equipment and external controllers.

C PHONO IN
This audio input is for connecting a turntable.

D COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1, 2, and 3
These RCA component video inputs are for connecting components with a component video output,
such as a DVD player, DVD recorder, or DVR (digital video recorder). They’re assignable, which
means you can assign each one to an input selector
to suit your setup. See “Component Video Input
Setup” on page 48.

E COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1
This RCA component video output is for connecting a TV or projector with a component video input.

F COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 2/
ZONE 2 OUT
This RCA component video output is for connecting a TV or projector with a component video input
located in your main listening room or Zone 2.

G HDMI IN 1–4, OUT MAIN, and OUT SUB
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) connections carry digital audio and digital video.
The HDMI inputs are for connecting components
with an HDMI output, such as a DVD player, DVD
recorder, or DVR (digital video recorder). They’re
assignable, which means you can assign each one to
an input selector to suit your setup. See “HDMI
Input Setup” on page 47.
The HDMI outputs are for connecting a TV or projector with an HDMI input.

H SIRIUS antenna
This jack is for connecting a SIRIUS digital
antenna, sold separately (see page 67).

I XM antenna
This jack is for connecting an XM Mini-Tuner and
Home Dock, sold separately (see page 62).

J MONITOR OUT
The S-Video or composite video jack should be
connected to a video input on your TV or projector.

K ZONE 2 OUT
This composite video output can be connected to a
video input on a TV in Zone 2.

L IR IN A/B and OUT
A commercially available IR receiver can be connected to the IR IN A or B jack, allowing you to
control the AV controller while you’re in Zone 2, or
control it when it’s out of sight, for example,
installed in a cabinet.
A commercially available IR emitter can be connected to the IR OUT jack to pass IR (infrared)
remote control signals through to other components.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 12 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Getting to Know the AV Controller—Continued
M 12V TRIGGER OUT (A/B/C)
These outputs can be connected to the 12-volt trigger inputs on other components.

N ETHERNET
This port is for connecting the AV controller to
home automation equipment and external controllers. Use only shielded Ethernet cables.

O AM and FM ANTENNA (HD Radio)
The AM push terminals are for connecting an AM
antenna. The FM jack is for connecting an FM
antenna.

P AC INLET
The supplied power cord is connected here. The
other end of the power cord should be connected to
a suitable wall outlet.

Q DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 1, 2, and 3
These coaxial digital audio inputs are for connecting components with a coaxial digital audio output,
such as a CD player or DVD player. They’re assignable, which means you can assign each one to an
input selector to suit your setup. See “Digital Input
Setup” on page 49.

R DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1, 2, and OUT
These optical digital audio inputs are for connecting
components with an optical digital audio output,
such as a CD player or DVD player. They’re assignable, which means you can assign each one to an
input selector to suit your setup. See “Digital Input
Setup” on page 49.
The optical digital audio output is for connecting a
digital recorder with an optical digital input, such as
a CD recorder.

S GND screw
This screw is for connecting a turntable’s ground
wire.

T BALANCE L/R INPUT
This balanced XLR input is for connecting a component with a stereo balanced XLR output. For a
mono source, connect to the BALANCE L XLR.

U CD IN
This analog audio input is for connecting a CD
player’s analog audio output.

V TAPE IN/OUT
These analog audio input and output jacks are for
connecting a recorder with an analog audio input and
output, such as a cassette deck, MD recorder, etc.

W AUX 1 IN
A VCR for playback only or other video source can
be connected here. There’s S-Video and composite
video input jacks for connecting the video signal.

Y CBL/SAT IN
A cable or satellite receiver can be connected here.
There’s S-Video and composite video input jacks
for connecting the video signal.

Z VCR/DVR IN/OUT
A video component, such as a VCR or DVR, can be
connected here for recording and playback. There’s
S-Video and composite video input and output jacks
for connecting the video signal.

a DVD IN
This input is for connecting a DVD player. There’s
S-Video and composite video input jacks for connecting the video signal.

b FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURR L/R, SURR
BACK L/R, and SUBWOOFER PREOUT
These balanced XLR outputs are for connecting a
multichannel power amplifier and powered subwoofer.
The FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R outputs can
be used with front speakers and surround back
speakers, respectively, or used to bi-amp the front
speakers. See “Bi-amping the Front Speakers” on
page 23.

c MULTI CH input: FRONT L/R, CENTER,
SUBWOOFER, SURR L/R, and SURR BACK
L/R
This analog multichannel input is for connecting a
component with a 5.1/7.1-channel analog audio output, such as a DVD player, DVD-Audio or
SACD-capable player, or an MPEG decoder.

d PRE OUT: FRONT L/R, CENTER,
SUBWOOFER, SURR L/R, and SURR BACK
L/R
This 5.1/7.1 multichannel analog audio output can
be connected to the analog audio input on a multichannel power amplifier for when you want to use
the AV controller solely as a preamplifier. The SUBWOOFER jack is for connecting a powered subwoofer.

e PRE OUT: ZONE 2, ZONE 3
These analog audio outputs can be connected to the
line inputs on amplifiers in Zone 2 and Zone 3. The
SW jacks can be connected to the inputs on powered subwoofers in Zone 2 and Zone 3.

f AC OUTLET
These switched AC outlets can be used to supply
power to other AV components. The type and number of outlets depends on the country in which you
purchased your AV controller.

X GAME/TV IN
A game console or TV output can be connected
here. There’s S-Video and composite video input
jacks for connecting the video signal.

See pages 19–42 for hookup information.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 13 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Remote Controller
Installing the Batteries

To open the battery compartment, press
the small hollow and slide open the cover.

Using the Remote Controller
When using the remote controller, point it toward the AV
controller’s remote control sensor, as shown below.
Remote control sensor
STANDBY indicator

AV controller

30˚

Insert the three supplied batteries (AA/R6)
in accordance with the polarity diagram
inside the battery compartment.

Slide the cover shut.

Notes:
• If the remote controller doesn’t work reliably, try
replacing the batteries.
• Don’t mix new and old batteries or different types of
batteries.
• If you intend not to use the remote controller for a long
time, remove the batteries to prevent damage from
leakage or corrosion.
• Expired batteries should be removed as soon as possible to prevent damage from leakage or corrosion.

30˚

Approx. 16 ft.
(5 m)

Notes:
• The remote controller may not work reliably if the AV
controller is subjected to bright light, such as direct
sunlight or inverter-type fluorescent lights. Keep this
in mind when installing.
• If another remote controller of the same type is used in
the same room, or the AV controller is installed close
to equipment that uses infrared rays, the remote controller may not work reliably.
• Don’t put anything on top of the remote controller,
such as a book or magazine, because a button may be
pressed continuously, thereby draining the batteries.
• The remote controller may not work reliably if the AV
controller is installed in a rack behind colored glass
doors. Keep this in mind when installing.
• The remote controller will not work if there’s an obstacle between it and the AV controller’s remote control
sensor.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 14 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Remote Controller—Continued
About the Remote Controller Modes
As well as the AV controller, you can also use the remote
controller to control your other AV components. The
remote controller has a specific operating mode for use
with each type of component. Modes are selected by
using the REMOTE MODE buttons.
■ RECEIVER/TAPE Mode
In RECEIVER/TAPE mode, you can control the AV
controller and an Onkyo cassette recorder connected via
.

RECEIVER/TAPE Mode
RECEIVER/TAPE mode is used to control the AV controller. It can also be used to control an Onkyo cassette
recorder connected via
.
To set the remote controller to RECEIVER/TAPE
mode, press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE
button.

■ DVD Mode
By default, you can control an Onkyo DVD player in this
mode. By entering the appropriate remote control code,
you can control components made by other manufacturers (see page 116).

B
C

■ CD/CDR/MD Mode
By default, you can control an Onkyo CD player in this
mode. By entering the appropriate remote control code,
you can control a CD player, MD recorder, or CD
recorder made by another manufacturer (see page 116).
■ DOCK Mode
This mode is for controlling an Apple iPod in an Onkyo
RI Dock. By default, you can control an RI Dock that has
a remote control sensor, such as the DS-A2. To control
an RI Dock that’s connected via
, you must enter the
appropriate remote control code first (see page 116).

■ ZONE 2/ZONE 3 Modes
These modes are for controlling Zone 2 and Zone 3 (see
page 111).

STANDBY

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

TV
INPUT

D. TUN

+10

TV VOL

CLEAR

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

MACRO

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

TAPE/AMP

5
F
G
H
I

ZONE2

CDR/MD

RECEIVER
CABLE

DOCK

SAT

RECEIVER
SLEEP

P
TO

1
2

Use the buttons supported by that mode
to control the component.
RECEIVER/TAPE mode: see right column
DVD mode: see page 16
CD/MD/CDR mode: see page 17
DOCK mode: see page 18
TV, VCR, CABLE/SAT modes: see page 118

TAPE/AMP

DIMMER
U
MEN

MEN
U

+
CH

PREV
CH

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

ID E

TUP

E XI

DISPLAY

P
Q
R

RN
RETU
MUTING

1
REC

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

LISTENING MODE

J
K

STEREO

SURR

REPEAT

AUDIO

PURE A

DIRECT

THX

ALL ST

TEST TONE

CH SEL

LEVEL-

LEVEL+

AUDIO SEL

L NIGHT

Re-EQ

VCR

DVD

HDD

SUBTITLE PLAY MODE

OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF

Use the REMOTE MODE buttons to select
a mode.

PHONO

■ TV and VCR Modes
With these modes, you can control a TV and VCR. You
must enter the appropriate remote control code first (see
page 116).
■ CABLE/SAT Mode
In CABLE/SAT mode, you can control a cable or satellite TV receiver. You must enter the appropriate remote
control code first (see page 116).

RC-690M

S
T
U

Note:
• Some of the remote controller functions described in
this manual may not work as expected with other components.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 15 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Remote Controller—Continued
For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.

T L NIGHT button (89)
Turns the Late Night function on or off.

A STANDBY button (43)
Sets the AV controller to Standby.

B ON button (43)

U AUDIO SEL button (78)
Selects the audio input: analog, digital, HDMI, or
multichannel.

Turns on the AV controller.

C INPUT SELECTOR buttons (57)
Used to select the input source.

D MACRO buttons (120)
Used with the Macro function.

E DIMMER button (76)
Adjusts the display brightness.

F Arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] and ENTER buttons
Used to select and adjust settings.

G CH +/– button (75)
Selects radio presets.

H SETUP button
Used to change settings.

I DISPLAY button (77)
Displays information about the current input source.

J LISTENING MODE buttons (79)
Used to select the listening modes. The [STEREO],
[SURR], and LISTENING MODE [ ]/[ ] buttons can be used at any time, regardless of the currently selected remote controller mode.

K TEST TONE, CH SEL, LEVEL–, and LEVEL+

■ TAPE mode
On twin cassette decks, only Deck B can be controlled.
1 Previous and Next [
]/[
] buttons
The Previous [
] button selects the previous
track. During playback it selects the beginning of
the current track. The Next [
] button selects the
next track.
Depending on how they were recorded, the Previous
and Next [
]/[
] buttons may not work properly with some cassette tapes.
Play [ ] button
Starts playback.
Rewind and Fast Forward [ ]/[ ] buttons
The Rewind [ ] button starts rewind. The Fast
Forward [ ] button starts fast forward.
Reverse Play [ ] button
Starts reverse playback.
Stop [ ] button
Stops playback.
REC [ ] button
Starts recording.

buttons (76, 98)
Used to adjust the level of each speaker.

L Light button
Turns the remote controller’s illuminated buttons on
or off.

M D.TUN button (59)
Selects the Direct tuning mode for radio.

N REMOTE MODE buttons (14)
Used to select the remote controller modes. When
you press a button, the REMOTE MODE button for
the currently selected mode lights up.

O SLEEP button (77)
Used with the Sleep function.

P VOL [ ]/[ ] button (57)
Adjusts the volume of the AV controller regardless
of the currently selected remote controller mode.

Q RETURN button
Returns to the previous display when changing settings.

R MUTING button (76)
Mutes or unmutes the AV controller.

S Re-EQ button (89)
Turns the Re-EQ function on or off.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 16 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Remote Controller—Continued
A STANDBY button

DVD Mode

Sets the DVD player to Standby.

To set the remote controller to DVD mode, press the
[DVD] REMOTE MODE button.

B ON button
Turns on the DVD player.

C Number buttons
Used to enter title, chapter, and track numbers, and
to enter times for locating specific points.

D TOP MENU button
Selects a DVD’s top menu.

A
B
C

E Arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] and ENTER buttons
ON

STANDBY

DVD

VCR/DVR

Used to navigate menus and select items.

TV
INPUT

F DISC +/– button

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

G SETUP button
Used to access the DVD player’s settings.

PHONO

+10

Selects discs on a DVD changer.

D. TUN

H DISPLAY button

TV VOL

CLEAR

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

MACRO

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

ZONE2

CDR/MD
TV

CABLE

DOCK

SAT

TAPE/AMP
SLEEP

DIMMER

DVD
RECEIVER

PM
TO

ENU

MEN
U

G
H

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

PREV
CH

ID E

SE
TUP

E XI

K AUDIO button

RN
RETU

DISPLAY

MUTING

Opens and closes the disc tray.
REC

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

M CLEAR button

STEREO

SURR

REPEAT

AUDIO

PURE A

DIRECT

THX

ALL ST

TEST TONE

CH SEL

LEVEL-

LEVEL+

SUBTITLE PLAY MODE

Displays a DVD’s menu.

Q
R

AUDIO SEL

L NIGHT

Re-EQ

VCR

DVD

HDD

O RETURN button
Exits the DVD player’s onscreen setup menu.

P RANDOM button

OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF

RC-690M

Cancels functions and clears entered numbers.

N MENU button

LISTENING MODE

Selects foreign language soundtracks and audio formats (e.g., Dolby Digital or DTS).

L OPEN/CLOSE [ ] button

J
K

From left to right: Previous, Play, Next, Rewind,
Pause, Stop, Fast Forward, Slow Reverse, and Slow
Forward.
Used with the repeat playback function.

I Playback buttons

J REPEAT button

Displays information about the current disc, title,
chapter, or track, including elapsed time, remaining
time, total time, and so on.

Used with the random playback function.

Q PLAY MODE button
Selects play modes on components with selectable
play modes.

R SUBTITLE button
Selects subtitles.

S VIDEO OFF button
Turns off the internal video circuitry, eliminating
any possibility of interference.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 17 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Remote Controller—Continued
A STANDBY button

CD/MD/CDR Modes

Sets the component to Standby.

To control an Onkyo CD player, MD recorder, or CD
recorder, or a CD or MD player/recorder made by
another manufacturer, press the [CD] REMOTE
MODE button to select the CD/MD/CDR remote controller mode.
In order to control an Onkyo MD recorder or CD
recorder, or a component made by another manufacturer,
you must first enter the appropriate remote control code
(see page 116).

B ON button
Set the component to On or Standby.

C Number buttons
Used to enter track numbers and times for locating
specific points.

D Arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] and ENTER buttons
Used with some components.

E DISC +/– button
Selects discs on a CD changer.

F DISPLAY button
Displays information about the current disc or track,
including elapsed time, remaining time, total time,
and so on.

A
ON

STANDBY

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

B
C

INPUT

TAPE

TUNER

From left to right: Previous, Play, Next, Rewind,
Pause, Stop, and Fast Forward.

H REC [ ] button

PHONO

D. TUN

+10

G Playback buttons

Starts recording.

TV VOL

CLEAR

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

MACRO

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

CABLE

ZONE2

CDR/MD
DOCK

SAT

Used with some components.

M RANDOM button

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

PREV
CH

Used with the random playback function.
ID E

SE
TUP

E XI

N PLAY MODE button

RN
RETU

DISPLAY

MUTING

7
8

REC

Opens or closes the disc tray or ejects the MiniDisc.

L RETURN button

MEN
U

J OPEN/CLOSE [ ] button

Cancels functions and clears entered numbers.

SLEEP

ENU
PM

Used with the repeat playback function.

K CLEAR button

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

CDR/MD

I REPEAT button

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

Selects play modes on components with selectable
play modes.

LISTENING MODE

STEREO

SURR

REPEAT

AUDIO

PURE A

DIRECT

THX

ALL ST

TEST TONE

CH SEL

LEVEL-

LEVEL+

AUDIO SEL

L NIGHT

Re-EQ

VCR

DVD

HDD

SUBTITLE PLAY MODE

OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF

RC-690M

PR-SC885_En.book Page 18 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Remote Controller—Continued
A STANDBY button

DOCK Mode

Turns off the iPod.

DOCK mode is for controlling an Apple iPod in an
Onkyo RI Dock.
When Using an RI Dock:
• Connect the RI Dock to the TAPE IN or GAME/TV
IN L/R jacks.
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to HDD or
HDD/DOCK.
• Set the AV controller’s Input Display to DOCK (see
page 49).
• To control a DS-A1 RI Dock, you must enter the
appropriate remote control code first (see page 116).
• See to the RI Dock’s instruction manual for more
information.
To set the remote controller to DOCK mode, press the
[DOCK] REMOTE MODE button.

B ON button*
Turns on the iPod.

C TOP MENU button
Works as a Mode button when used with a DS-A2
RI Dock.

D Arrow [ ]/[ ] and ENTER buttons*
Used to navigate menus and select items.

E ALBUM +/– button*
Selects the next or previous album.

F DISPLAY button*
Turns on the backlight for 30 seconds.

G Previous [

] button
Restarts the current song. Press it twice to select the
previous song.

H Pause [ ] button
Pauses playback. (With 3rd generation iPods, it
works as a Play/Pause button.)

A
ON

STANDBY

DVD

VCR/DVR

I Rewind [

] button
Press and hold to rewind.

INPUT
CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

]/[ ] buttons*
Used to select the previous or next playlist on the
iPod.

PHONO

D. TUN

+10

J PLAYLIST [

K REPEAT button*

TV VOL

CLEAR

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

Used with the repeat function.

L MENU button*

MACRO

ZONE3

Used to access menus.

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

CABLE

ZONE2

CDR/MD

C
4

DOCK

SAT

DOCK
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

SLEEP

P
TO

U
MEN

MEN
U

+
CH

6
7
8
9

PREV
CH

ID E

TUP

E XI

] button
Selects the next song.
Stops playback and displays a menu.

RN
RETU

DISPLAY

N Next [

O Stop [ ] button
GU

REC

Starts playback. If the component is off, it will turn
on automatically. (With 3rd generation iPods, this
button works as a Play/Pause button.)

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

M Play [ ] button

MUTING

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

M
N
O
P
Q

LISTENING MODE
STEREO

SURR

REPEAT

AUDIO

PURE A

DIRECT

THX

ALL ST

TEST TONE

CH SEL

LEVEL-

LEVEL+

AUDIO SEL

L NIGHT

Re-EQ

VCR

DVD

HDD

SUBTITLE PLAY MODE

P Fast Forward [

] button
Press and hold to fast forward.

Q RANDOM button*
Used with the shuffle function.

R PLAY MODE button
Used to select play modes on components with
selectable play modes.
Works as a Resume button when used with a DS-A2
RI Dock.

OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF

RC-690M

*Buttons marked with an asterisk (*) are not supported
by 3rd generation iPods.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 19 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting a Power Amplifier and Speakers
Enjoying Home Theater
Thanks to the AV controller’s superb capabilities, you can enjoy surround sound with a real sense of movement in your
own home—just like being in a movie theater or concert hall. You can enjoy DVDs featuring Dolby Digital or DTS.
With analog or digital TV, you can enjoy Dolby Pro Logic IIx, DTS Neo:6, or Onkyo’s original DSP listening modes.
You can also enjoy THX Surround EX (THX-certified THX speaker system recommended).
Front left and right speakers
These output the main sound. Their role in a home theater is to provide a solid
anchor for the sound image. They should be positioned facing the listener at
about ear level, and equally spaced from the TV. Angle them inward slightly so
as to create a triangle, with the listener at the apex.

Center speaker
This speaker enhances the front left
and right speakers, making sound
movements distinct and providing a
full sound image. For movies it’s used
mainly for dialog.
Position it close to your TV (preferably
on top) facing forward at about ear
level, or at the same height as the
front left and right speakers.

Subwoofer
The subwoofer handles the bass sounds of
the LFE (Low-Frequency Effects) channel.
The volume and quality of the bass output
from your subwoofer will depend on its position, the shape of your listening room, and
your listening position. In general, a good bass
sound can be obtained by installing the subwoofer in a front corner, or at one-third the way
along the front wall, as shown.

Surround left and right speakers
These speakers are used for precise
sound positioning and to add realistic
ambience.
Position them at the sides of the listener, or slightly behind, about 2–3 feet
(60–100 cm) above ear level. Ideally
they should be equally spaced from the
listener.

Surround back left and right speakers
These speakers are necessary to enjoy Dolby Digital
EX, DTS-ES Matrix, DTS-ES Discrete, THX Surround
EX, etc. They enhance the realism of surround sound
and improve sound localization behind the listener. Position them behind the listener about 2–3 feet
(60–100 cm) above ear level.

Tip: To find the best position for your subwoofer, while playing a movie or some music
with good bass, experiment by placing your
subwoofer at various positions within the
room and choose the
one that provides
the most satisfying
results.
Corner
position

1/3 of wall
position

PR-SC885_En.book Page 20 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting a Power Amplifier and Speakers—Continued
Using Dipole Speakers

Connecting Your Speakers
The AV controller is designed to be used with a separate
multichannel power amplifier. You connect the AV controller’s PRE OUT jacks to the amplifier’s inputs, and
connect your speakers to the amplifier’s speakers terminals. Speaker settings such as crossover frequency and
distance are set on the AV controller.

Speaker Configuration
For the best surround-sound experience, you should use
seven speakers and a powered subwoofer.

You can use dipole speakers for the surround left and
right and surround back left and right speakers. Dipole
speakers output the same sound in two directions.
Dipole speakers typically have an arrow printed on them to
indicate how they should be positioned. The surround left
and right dipole speakers should be positioned so that their
arrows point toward your TV or screen, while the surround
back left and right dipolar speakers should be positioned
so that their arrows point toward each other, as shown.

Number of speakers:

Front left

✓

Front right

✓

Center

✓

Surround left

✓

Surround right

✓

Surround back*
Surround back left

✓

Surround back right

✓

* If you’re using only one surround back speaker, use the SURR
BACK L output.

No matter how many speakers you use, a powered subwoofer is recommended for a powerful and solid bass.
To get the best from your surround-sound system, you
must set the speaker settings. You can do this automatically (see page 52) or manually (see page 94).

TV/screen

1. Subwoofer
2. Front left speaker
3. Center speaker
4. Front right speaker
5. Surround left speaker

TV/screen

✓

Normal speakers

Dipole speakers

The following table shows which channels you should
use based on the number of speakers you have.

6. Surround right speaker
7. Surround back left
speaker
8. Surround back right
speaker

PR-SC885_En.book Page 21 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting a Power Amplifier and Speakers—Continued
Connecting a Powered Subwoofer
You can also connect a powered subwoofer to the AV
controller’s balanced SUBWOOFER PRE OUT XLR
jack by using a balanced XLR cable.

Using a suitable cable, connect the AV controller’s SUBWOOFER PRE OUT to the input on your powered subwoofer. If your subwoofer is unpowered and you’re
using an external amplifier, connect the SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT to the amp’s input.

HDMI
ASSIGNABLE

IN 4

RS232

IN 3

IN 2

OUT
MAIN

IN 1

OUT
SUB

ETHERNET
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
OUT 1

IN 2

MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT

SIRIUS
AM

Y
V

HDMI

Powered
subwoofer

ASSIGNABLE

IN 4

RS232

IN 3

IN 2

OUT
MAIN

IN 1

ETHERNET
IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
OUT 1

IN 2

MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT

SIRIUS

Y
V

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

MONITOR
OUT V

DVD

VCR/DVR

CB/PB

REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

IR
A
IN

ZONE 2
OUT

(DVD)

OUT

FRONT

CENTER

SURR

A
SURR BACK

B
FRONT

CENTER

SURR

A
IN

ZONE 2
OUT

A
B

FM
75

12V TRIGGER OUT
ZONE 2

OUT

FRONT

OUT

CENTER

SURR

A
SURR BACK

B
FRONT

ZONE 3

SW
CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK

(VCR/DVR)

(CBL/SAT)

OUT

CR/PR

OPTICAL

PHONO

IN 1

SURR BACK

GND

TAPE

AUX 1

BALANCE L

BALANCE R

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

SURR BACK R

MONO

Bi-AMP

SURR R

VCR/DVR

SUBWOOFER

DVD

FRONT R

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH

FRONT L

SURR L

PRE OUT

SURR BACK L
Bi-AMP

PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER

IN 2

INPUT

(CD)

(VCR/DVR)

CB/PB

IN
IN 2

ZON

(GAME/TV)

MONITOR
OUT V

CR/PR
S

DVD

VCR/DVR

COAXIAL

IN 3

ZONE 2

(DVD)

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1

12V TRIGGER OUT

COAXIAL

IN 2

DIGITAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1

REMOTE
CONTROL

Powered
subwoofer

OUT
SUB

COMPONENT VIDEO

AUX 1

2
3

OUT

IN 3

HOT

(CBL/SAT)

GND

COLD

R
PHONO

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

GND

BALANCE R

TAPE
BALANCE L
MONO

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

SURR BACK R

VCR/DVR

SURR R

Bi-AMP

SUBWOOFER

DVD
CENTER

FRONT R

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH

SURR L

FRONT L

PRE OUT

HOT

COLD

INPUT

OPTICAL
LINE INPUT

PRE OUT

SURR BACK L

SUBWOOFER

Bi-AMP

IN 2
(CD)

1
3

OUT
HOT

GND

COLD

INPUT

PRE

INPUT

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT

LINE INPUT

Balanced
XLR cable
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT

Connecting a Power Amplifier with RCA Inputs
You can connect the AV controller to a multichannel power amplifier with RCA input jacks by using a multichannel
RCA audio cable or several stereo RCA audio cables.
See your multichannel power amplifier’s instruction manual for more information on connecting speakers.
V

REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

DVD

MONITOR
OUT V

CB/PB

IR
A
IN

ZONE 2
OUT

ANTENNA

ZONE 2

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

IN 2

(VCR/DVR)

ZONE 3

CR/PR
S

IN 3

AC OUTLET

FM
75
12V TRIGGER OUT

ASSIGNABLE

OUT

FRONT

OUT

CENTER

SURR

A
SURR BACK

B
FRONT

SW
CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK

AC 120V 60Hz
SWITCHED
120W 1A MAX.

(CBL/SAT)

OPTICAL

PHONO

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

GND

BALANCE R

TAPE
BALANCE L
MONO

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

SURR R

VCR/DVR
FRONT R

SUBWOOFER

DVD
CENTER

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH

FRONT L

SURR L

PRE OUT

SURR BACK L
Bi-AMP

PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER

IN 2
(CD)

GND

2
3

OUT
HOT

COLD

HOT

COLD

INPUT

PRE OUT

AV controller
Multichannel
power amplifier
SURROUND BACK
RIGHT

INPUT
SELECT

OUTPUT

SURROUND
RIGHT

INPUT
SELECT

OUTPUT

FRONT
RIGHT

CENTER

INPUT
SELECT

OUTPUT

SURROUND
LEFT

FRONT
LEFT

INPUT
SELECT

OUTPUT

SURROUND BACK
LEFT

INPUT
SELECT

OUTPUT

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE
4 OHMS MIN. PER EACH
SPEAKER TERMINAL

FUSE

AC INLET

12V TRIGGER
IN

Surround
back right
speaker

Surround
right
speaker

Front right
speaker

Center
speaker

Front left
speaker

SEVEN CHANNEL AMPLIFIER

MODEL NO. RDA-7.1

OUT

Surround
left
speaker

Surround
back left
speaker

PR-SC885_En.book Page 22 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting a Power Amplifier and Speakers—Continued
Connecting a Power Amplifier with XLR Inputs
You can connect the AV controller to a multichannel power amplifier with balanced XLR input jacks by using several
XLR audio cables.
The AV controller’s balanced PRE OUT XLR jacks are wired as shown.
1

2
3

GND

HOT

COLD

See your multichannel power amplifier’s instruction manual for more information on connecting speakers.
AV controller

HDMI

AC INLET

ASSIGNABLE

IN 4

RS232

IN 3

IN 2

OUT
MAIN

IN 1

OUT
SUB

HD RADIO

XM
ETHERNET
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR

IN 2

MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT

SIRIUS

OUT 1

Y
V

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

DVD

VCR/DVR

MONITOR
OUT V

CB/PB

REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

AUX 1

A
IN

ZONE 2
OUT

ANTENNA

ZONE 2

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

IN 2

(VCR/DVR)

ZONE 3

CR/PR
S

IN 3

AC OUTLET

FM
75
12V TRIGGER OUT

ASSIGNABLE

OUT

FRONT

CENTER

SURR

A
SURR BACK

B
FRONT

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK

AC 120V 60Hz
SWITCHED
120W 1A MAX.

(CBL/SAT)

OPTICAL

PHONO

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

GND

BALANCE R

TAPE
BALANCE L
MONO

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

VCR/DVR

SURR R

SUBWOOFER

DVD
CENTER

FRONT R

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH

FRONT L

PRE OUT

SURR BACK L

SURR L

Bi-AMP

PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER

IN 2
(CD)

GND

2
3

OUT
HOT

COLD

HOT

COLD

INPUT

PRE OUT

Multichannel
power amplifier
SURROUND BACK
RIGHT

INPUT
SELECT

OUTPUT

SURROUND
RIGHT

INPUT
SELECT

OUTPUT

FRONT
RIGHT

CENTER

INPUT
SELECT

OUTPUT

SURROUND
LEFT

FRONT
LEFT

INPUT
SELECT

OUTPUT

SURROUND BACK
LEFT

INPUT
SELECT

OUTPUT

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE
4 OHMS MIN. PER EACH
SPEAKER TERMINAL

FUSE

AC INLET

12V TRIGGER
IN

Surround
back right
speaker

Surround
right
speaker

Front right
speaker

Center
speaker

Front left
speaker

SEVEN CHANNEL AMPLIFIER

MODEL NO. RDA-7.1

OUT

Surround
left
speaker

Surround
back left
speaker

PR-SC885_En.book Page 23 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting a Power Amplifier and Speakers—Continued
Bi-amping the Front Speakers
The FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R outputs can be used with front speakers and surround back speakers, respectively, or bi-amped to provide separate tweeter and woofer feeds for a pair of front speakers that support bi-amping,
providing improved bass and treble performance.
• When bi-amping is used, the AV controller is able to feed up to 5.1 speakers in the main room.
• For bi-amping, the FRONT L/R outputs feed the front speakers’ tweeter terminals. And the SURR BACK L/R
outputs feed the front speakers’ woofer terminals.
• Once you’ve completed the bi-amping connections shown below and turned on the AV controller, you must set
the Speaker Type setting to Bi-Amp to enable bi-amping (see page 44).
Important:
• When making the bi-amping connections, be sure to remove the jumper bars that link the speakers’
tweeter (high) and woofer (low) terminals.
• Bi-amping can only be used with speakers that support bi-amping. Refer to your speaker manual.
See your multichannel power amplifier’s instruction manual for more information on connecting speakers.
Y
V

DIGITAL

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

DVD

VCR/DVR

MONITOR
OUT V

CB/PB

REMOTE
CONTROL

A
IN

ZONE 2
OUT

ANTENNA

ZONE 2

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

IN 2

(VCR/DVR)

ZONE 3

CR/PR
S

IN 3

AC OUTLET

FM
75
12V TRIGGER OUT

ASSIGNABLE

OUT

FRONT

OUT

CENTER

SURR

A
SURR BACK

B
FRONT

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK

AC 120V 60Hz
SWITCHED
120W 1A MAX.

(CBL/SAT)

OPTICAL

PHONO

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

GND

BALANCE R

TAPE
BALANCE L
MONO

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

VCR/DVR

SURR R

SUBWOOFER

DVD

FRONT R

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH

FRONT L

PRE OUT

SURR BACK L

SURR L

Bi-AMP

PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER

IN 2
(CD)

GND

2
3

OUT
HOT

COLD

HOT

COLD

INPUT

PRE OUT

AV controller
Multichannel
power amplifier
SURROUND BACK
RIGHT

INPUT
SELECT

OUTPUT

SURROUND
RIGHT

INPUT
SELECT

OUTPUT

FRONT
RIGHT

CENTER

INPUT
SELECT

OUTPUT

SURROUND
LEFT

FRONT
LEFT

INPUT
SELECT

OUTPUT

SURROUND BACK
LEFT

INPUT
SELECT

OUTPUT

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE
4 OHMS MIN. PER EACH
SPEAKER TERMINAL

FUSE

AC INLET

12V TRIGGER
IN

Surround right
speaker

Center speaker

OUT

SEVEN CHANNEL AMPLIFIER

MODEL NO. RDA-7.1

Surround left
speaker

Woofer (low)
Tweeter (high)

Front right speaker

Front left speaker

PR-SC885_En.book Page 24 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting Antennas
This section explains how to connect the supplied indoor
FM antenna and AM loop antenna, and how to connect
commercially available outdoor FM and AM antennas.
The AV controller won’t pick up any radio signals
without any antenna connected, so you must connect the
antenna to use the tuner.

Connecting the AM Loop Antenna
The supplied indoor AM loop antenna is for indoor use
only.

Assemble the AM loop antenna, inserting
the tabs into the base, as shown.

Connect both wires of the AM loop
antenna to the AM push terminals, as
shown.
(The antenna’s wires are not polarity sensitive, so
they can be connected either way around).

AM antenna push terminals

HD RADIO

ANTENNA
FM
75

FM antenna jack

Connecting the Indoor FM Antenna
The supplied indoor FM antenna is for indoor use only.

Attach the FM antenna, as shown.

FM
75

Insert the plug fully
into the jack.

Once your AV controller is ready for use, you’ll
need to tune into an FM radio station and adjust
the position of the FM antenna to achieve the best
possible reception.

Make sure that the wires are attached securely and
that the push terminals are gripping the bare
wires, not the insulation.

Use thumbtacks or something similar to
fix the FM antenna into position.

Push

Insert wire

Release

Once your AV controller is ready for use, you’ll
need to tune into an AM radio station and adjust
the position of the AM antenna to achieve the best
possible reception.
Keep the antenna as far away as possible from
your AV controller, TV, speaker cables, and power
cords.

Thumbtacks, etc.

Caution: Be careful that you don’t injure yourself
when using thumbtacks.
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied
indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available outdoor FM antenna instead (see page 25).

If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied
indoor AM loop antenna, try using it with a commercially available outdoor AM antenna (see page 25).

PR-SC885_En.book Page 25 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting Antennas—Continued
Connecting an Outdoor FM Antenna

Connecting an Outdoor AM Antenna

If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied
indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available outdoor FM antenna instead.

If good reception cannot be achieved using the supplied
AM loop antenna, an outdoor AM antenna can be used in
addition to the loop antenna, as shown.
Outdoor antenna
Insulated antenna cable
AM loop antenna

FM
75

Notes:
• Outdoor FM antennas work best outside, but usable
results can sometimes be obtained when installed in an
attic or loft.
• For best results, install the outdoor FM antenna well
away from tall buildings, preferably with a clear line
of sight to your local FM transmitter.
• Outdoor antenna should be located away from possible noise sources, such as neon signs, busy roads, etc.
• For safety reasons, outdoor antenna should be situated
well away from power lines and other high-voltage
equipment.
• Outdoor antenna must be grounded in accordance
with local regulations to prevent electrical shock hazards.

Outdoor AM antennas work best when installed horizontally outside, but good results can sometimes be obtained
indoors by mounting horizontally above a window. Note
that the AM loop antenna should be left connected.
Outdoor antenna must be grounded in accordance with
local regulations to prevent electrical shock hazards.

■ Using a TV/FM Antenna Splitter
It’s best not to use the same antenna for both FM and TV
reception, as this can cause interference problems. If circumstances demand it, use a TV/FM antenna splitter, as
shown.

TV/FM antenna splitter
To AV controller

To TV (or VCR)

PR-SC885_En.book Page 26 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting Your Components
AV Connection Color Coding

About AV Connections

RCA-type AV connections are usually color coded: red,
white, and yellow. Use red plugs to connect rightchannel audio inputs and outputs (typically labeled “R”).
Use white plugs to connect left-channel audio inputs and
outputs (typically labeled “L”). And use yellow plugs to
connect composite video inputs and outputs.

• Before making any AV connections, read the manuals
supplied with your other AV components.
• Don’t connect the power cord until you’ve completed
and double-checked all AV connections.

Optical Digital Jacks

Left (white)

The AV controller’s optical digital jacks have shuttertype covers that open when an optical plug is inserted
and close when it’s removed. Push plugs in all the way.

Analog audio

Right (red)
(Yellow)

Caution: To prevent shutter damage, hold the optical
plug straight when inserting and removing.

Left (white)
Right (red)

Composite video

• Push plugs in all the way to make
good connections (loose connections
can cause noise or malfunctions).
• To prevent interference, keep audio
and video cables away from power
cords and speaker cables.

(Yellow)
Right!

Wrong!

AV Cables and Jacks
Video
Cable

Jack

Description

HDMI connections can carry uncompressed standard- or high-definition digital video and audio and
offer the best picture and sound quality.

HDMI

Component
video cable

Component video separates the luminance (Y) and
color difference signals (PR, PB), providing the best
picture quality. (Some TV manufacturers label their
component video jacks slightly differently.)

CB/PB

CR/PR

S-Video cable

S-Video separates the luminance and color signals and
provides better picture quality than composite video.

Composite
video cable

Composite video is commonly used on TVs, VCRs,
and other video equipment.

Audio
Optical digital
audio cable

OPTICAL

Coaxial digital
audio cable

COAXIAL

Balanced XLR
cable
INPUT

FRONT

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

SURR

SURR BACK

MULTI CH

Note: The AV controller does not support SCART connections.

This offers the best sound quality and allows you to
enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS. The audio quality is the
same as for optical.
This cable carries analog audio. Balanced XLR
cables are used for better noise immunity and longer
cable runs.
This cable carries analog audio. It’s the most common
connection format for analog audio and can be found
on virtually all AV components.

Analog audio
cable (RCA)

Multichannel
analog audio
cable (RCA)

PREOUT

This offers the best sound quality and allows you to
enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS. The audio quality is the
same as for coaxial.

This cable carries multichannel analog audio and is
typically used to connect DVD players with a 7.1channel analog audio output. Several standard analog
audio cables can be used instead of a multichannel
cable.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 27 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued
Connecting Audio and Video Signals to the AV Controller
By connecting both the audio and video outputs of your DVD player and other AV components to the AV controller,
you can switch the audio and video signals simultaneously simply by changing the input source on the AV controller.
: Signal Flow
Video

Video
Audio

Audio
TV, projector,
etc.

DVD player, etc.

Power
On

Of f

Standby

Seven Channel Amplifier

RDA-7.1

Power amplifier and speakers
(see page 20 for hookup details)

Which Connections Should I Use?
The AV controller supports several connection formats for compatibility with a wide range of AV equipment. The format
you choose will depend on the formats supported by your other components. Use the following sections as a guide.
For video components, you must make an audio connection and a video connection.

Video Connection Formats
Video equipment can be connected to the AV controller by using any one of the following video connection formats:
composite video, S-Video, component video, or HDMI, the latter offering the best picture quality.
The AV controller can upconvert and downconvert between video formats, depending on the HDMI Monitor setting,
which generally determines whether video signals are upconverted for the component video output or the HDMI output.
For optimal video performance, THX recommends that video signals pass through the system without upconversion (e.g., component video input through to component video output). It’s also recommended that you set the
Immediate Display preference to Off (page 105).
■ HDMI Monitor Setting Set to Main or Sub
With the HDMI Monitor setting set to Main or
Video Signal Flow Chart
Sub (see page 45), video input signals flow
DVD player, etc.
through the AV controller as shown, with composite video, S-Video, and component video
sources all being upconverted for the HDMI
output. Use this setting if you connect the AV
Composite
controller’s HDMI OUT to your TV.
The composite video, S-Video, and component
video outputs pass through their respective
input signals as they are.

S-Video

Component

HDMI

AV controller
MONITOR OUT
Composite

S-Video

Component

HDMI

TV, projector, etc.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 28 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued
■ HDMI Monitor Setting Set to No
With the HDMI Monitor setting set to No (see
page 45), video input signals flow through the
AV controller as shown, with composite video
and S-Video sources being upconverted for the
component video output. Use this setting if
you connect the AV controller’s COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1 or COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR
OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT to your TV.
Composite video is upconverted to S-Video
and S-Video is downconverted to composite
video. Note that these conversions only apply
to the MONITOR OUT V and S outputs, not
the VCR/DVR OUT V and S outputs.
The composite video, S-Video, and component
video pass through their respective input signals as they are.

Video Signal Flow Chart
DVD player, etc.

Composite

S-Video

Component

HDMI

IN
AV controller
MONITOR OUT
Composite

S-Video

Component

HDMI

TV, projector, etc.

Audio Connection Formats
Audio equipment can be connected to the AV
controller by using any of the following audio
connection formats: analog, optical, coaxial,
analog multichannel, or HDMI.
When choosing a connection format, bear in
mind that the AV controller does not convert
digital input signals for analog line outputs and
vice versa. For example, audio signals connected to an optical or coaxial digital input are
not output by the analog TAPE OUT.

Audio Signal Flow Chart
DVD player, etc.

Optical

HDMI

Optical

Coaxial

Analog

Multichannel

AV controller

MD recorder, etc.

HDMI

Analog

* 1 Depends on the HDMI Audio Out setting (see page 107).
* 2 Only the front L/R channels are output.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 29 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued
Connecting a TV or Projector
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your TV ( A , B , or C ), and then make the connection.
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your TV ( a , b , or c ), and then make the connection.
• With connection a , you can listen to and record audio from your TV or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection b or c . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use
a and b , or a and c .)
Connection

AV controller

Signal flow

Picture quality

COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1

Best

MONITOR OUT S

S-Video input

Better

MONITOR OUT V

Composite video input

Standard

GAME/TV IN L/R

DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2

DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1

⇒
⇒
⇒
⇐
⇐
⇐

Component video input

Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output

ASSIGNABLE

IN 4

RS232

IN 3

IN 2

OUT
MAIN

IN 1

OUT
SUB

COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR

IN 2

MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT

SIRIUS

OUT 1

Y
V

REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

DVD

VCR/DVR

MONITOR
OUT V

CB/PB

IR
A
IN

ZONE 2
OUT

12V TRIGGER OUT

ASSIGNABLE

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

IN 2

(VCR/DVR)

CR/PR

L
IN 3

OUT

FRONT

OUT

CENTER

SURR

A
SURR BACK

B
FRONT

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK

(CBL/SAT)

OPTICAL

PHONO

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

GND

BALANCE R

TAPE
BALANCE L
MONO

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

SURR R

VCR/DVR

SUBWOOFER

DVD

FRONT R

CENTER

MULTI CH

FRONT L

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT

SURR L

IN 2
(CD)

1
3

OUT
HOT

GND

COLD

INPUT

L
COAXIAL
OUT

Connect one
or the other

Hint!

OPTICAL
OUT

PR
Y
PB
COMPONENT VIDEO IN

R
AUDIO
OUT

S VIDEO
IN

VIDEO
IN

TV, projector,
etc.

If your TV has no audio outputs, connect an audio output from your VCR or cable or satellite
receiver to the AV controller and use its tuner to listen to TV programs through the AV controller
(see pages 32 and 34).

PR-SC885_En.book Page 30 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued
Connecting a DVD player
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your DVD player ( A , B , or C ), and then make the connection.
If you use connection A , you must connect the AV controller to your TV with the same type of connection.
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your DVD player ( a , b , or c ), and then make the connection.
• With connection a , you can listen to and record audio from a DVD or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection b or c . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use
a and b , or a and c .)
• If your DVD player has main left and right outputs and multichannel left and right outputs, be sure to use the
main left and right outputs for connection a .
Connection

AV controller

Signal flow

DVD player

COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1

Component video output

Best

DVD IN S

⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐

S-Video output

Better

Composite video output

Standard

DVD IN V

DVD IN L/R

DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 1

DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1

Picture quality

Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output

COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR

IN 2

MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT

SIRIUS

OUT 1

Y
V

REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

MONITOR
OUT V

DVD

CB/PB

IR
A
IN

ZONE 2
OUT

12V TRIGGER OUT

ASSIGNABLE

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

CR/PR
S

IN
IN 2

IN 3

OUT

FRONT

CENTER

SURR

A
SURR BACK

B
FRONT

CENTER

(VCR/DVR)

OUT

SURR

SURR BACK

(CBL/SAT)

OPTICAL

PHONO

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

GND

BALANCE R

TAPE
BALANCE L
MONO

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

SURR R

VCR/DVR
FRONT R

SUBWOOFER

DVD
CENTER

MULTI CH

FRONT L

a
SURR L

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT

SURR BACK L
Bi-AMP

IN 2

(CD)

1
3

OUT
HOT

GND

COLD

INPUT

L
COAXIAL
OUT

Connect one
or the other

OPTICAL
OUT

PR
Y
PB
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

R
AUDIO
OUT

S VIDEO
OUT

VIDEO
OUT

DVD player

To connect a DVD player or DVD-Audio/SACD-capable player with a
multichannel analog audio output, see page 31.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 31 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued
Hooking Up the Multichannel Input
If your DVD player supports multichannel audio formats such as DVD-Audio and SACD, and it has a multichannel
analog audio output, you can connect it to the AV controller’s multichannel input.
Use a multichannel analog audio cable, or several normal audio cables, to connect the AV controller’s MULTI CH
FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURR L/R, SURR BACK L/R, and SUBWOOFER jacks to the 7.1-channel analog audio
output on your DVD player. If your DVD player has a 5.1-channel analog audio output, don’t connect anything to the
AV controller’s SURR BACK L/R jacks.
Before using the multichannel input, you must assign it to an input selector. See “Analog Input Setup” on page 51. To
select the multichannel input, see “Selecting Audio Inputs” on page 78. To adjust the subwoofer sensitivity for the
multichannel input, see “Subwoofer Input Sensitivity” on page 107.

HDMI

AC INLET

ASSIGNABLE

IN 4

RS232

IN 3

IN 2

OUT
MAIN

IN 1

OUT
SUB

XM
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR

IN 2

ETHERNET

SIRIUS

MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT

7.1 ch
5.1 ch

OUT 1

Y
V

REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

DVD

MONITOR
OUT V

CB/PB

IR
ZONE 2
OUT

A
IN

12V TRIGGER OUT

ASSIGNABLE

ZONE 2

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

IN
IN 2

IN 3

ZONE 3

CR/PR
IN

OUT

FRONT

OUT

CENTER

SURR

A
SURR BACK

B
FRONT

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK

FRONT
L

(VCR/DVR)

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK

(CBL/SAT)

OPTICAL

PHONO

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

GND

BALANCE R

TAPE

BALANCE L
MONO

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

SURR R

VCR/DVR

FRONT R

SUBWOOFER

DVD

CENTER

MULTI CH

FRONT L

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT

SURR L

IN 2
(CD)

R
SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH

OUT
HOT

GND

COLD

INPUT

R
FRONT

L
CENTER

SUB
WOOFER

R
SURROUND

R
SURR
BACK

DVD player

PR-SC885_En.book Page 32 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued
Connecting a VCR or DVR for Playback
With this hookup, you can use the tuner in your VCR or DVR to listen to your favorite TV programs
via the AV controller, which is useful if your TV has no audio outputs.

Hint!

Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your VCR or DVR ( A , B , or C ), and then make the connection. If you use
connection A , you must connect the AV controller to your TV with the same type of connection.
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your VCR or DVR ( a , b , or c ), and then make the connection.
• With connection a , you can listen to the VCR or DVR in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection b or c . (To listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use a and
b , or a and c .)
Connection

AV controller

Signal flow

VCR or DVR

COMPONENT VIDEO IN 2

Component video output

Best

VCR/DVR IN S

⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐

S-Video output

Better

Composite video output

Standard

VCR/DVR IN V

VCR/DVR IN L/R

DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2

DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1

Picture quality

Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output

HDMI
ASSIGNABLE

IN 4

RS232

IN 3

IN 2

OUT
MAIN

IN 1

OUT
SUB

COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR

IN 2

MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT

SIRIUS

OUT 1

Y
V

REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

MONITOR
OUT V

DVD

CB/PB

IR
A
IN

ZONE 2
OUT

12V TRIGGER OUT

ASSIGNABLE

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

IN 2

(VCR/DVR)

CR/PR
S

L
IN 3

OUT

FRONT

OUT

CENTER

SURR

A
SURR BACK

B
FRONT

CENTER

SURR

(CBL/SAT)

OPTICAL

PHONO

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

GND

BALANCE R

TAPE
BALANCE L
MONO

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

SURR R

VCR/DVR
FRONT R

SUBWOOFER

DVD
CENTER

IN 2
(CD)

1
3

OUT
HOT

GND

COLD

INPUT

L
COAXIAL
OUT

OPTICAL
OUT

Y
PB
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

R
AUDIO
OUT

S VIDEO
OUT

Connect one
or the other
VCR or DVR

VIDEO
OUT

MULTI CH

FRONT L

a
SURR L

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT

SURR BACK

PR-SC885_En.book Page 33 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued
Connecting a VCR or DVR for Recording
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your VCR or DVR ( A or B ), and then make the connection. The video
source to be recorded must be connected to the AV controller via the same type of connection.
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your VCR or DVR ( a or b ), and then make the connection.

Connection

AV controller

Signal flow

VCR or DVD recorder

VCR/DVR OUT S

S-Video input

Better

VCR/DVR OUT V

⇒
⇒
⇒
⇒

Composite video input

Standard

VCR/DVR OUT L/R

DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT

Picture quality

Audio L/R input
Digital optical input

HDMI
ASSIGNABLE

IN 4

RS232

IN 3

IN 2

OUT
MAIN

IN 1

OUT
SUB

COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR

IN 2

MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT

SIRIUS

OUT 1

Y
V

REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

DVD

MONITOR
OUT V

CB/PB

IR
A
IN

ZONE 2
OUT

12V TRIGGER OUT

ASSIGNABLE

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

IN 2

(VCR/DVR)

CR/PR
S

L
IN 3

OUT

FRONT

OUT

CENTER

SURR

A
SURR BACK

B
FRONT

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK

(CBL/SAT)

OPTICAL

PHONO

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

GND

BALANCE R

TAPE
BALANCE L
MONO

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

SURR R

VCR/DVR
FRONT R

SUBWOOFER

DVD
CENTER

MULTI CH

FRONT L

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT

SURR L

IN 2
(CD)

1
3

OUT
HOT

GND

COLD

INPUT

L
OPTICAL
IN

R
AUDIO
IN

S VIDEO
IN

VIDEO
IN

VCR or DVR

Notes:
• The AV controller must be turned on for recording. Recording is not possible while it’s on Standby.
• If you want to record directly from your TV or another video source without going through the AV controller, connect
the audio and video outputs from your TV or other video component directly to the recording VCR/DVR’s audio and
video inputs. See the manuals supplied with your TV or VCR/DVR for details.
• Video signals connected to composite video inputs can only be recorded via the VCR/DVR OUT V jack. So if your
source TV or VCR is connected to a composite video input, the recording VCR/DVR must be connected to the
VCR/DVR OUT V jack. Likewise, video signals connected to S-Video inputs can only be recorded via the VCR/DVR
OUT S jack. So if your source TV or VCR is connected to an S-Video input, the recording VCR/DVR must be
connected to the VCR/DVR OUT S jack.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 34 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued
Connecting a Satellite, Cable, or Terrestrial Set-top box or Other Video Source
With this hookup, you can use your satellite or cable receiver to listen to your favorite TV programs
via the AV controller, which is useful if your TV has no audio outputs.

Hint!

Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches the video source ( A , B , or C ), and then make the connection.
If you use connection A , you must connect the AV controller to your TV with the same type of connection.
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches the video source ( a , b , or c ), and then make the connection.
• With connection a , you can listen to and record audio from the video source or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection b or c . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use
a and b , or a and c .)
Connection

AV controller

Signal flow

Video source

Picture quality

COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3

Best

CBL/SAT IN S

CBL/SAT IN V

⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐

Component video output

CBL/SAT IN L/R

DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 3

DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2

S-Video output

Better

Composite video output

Standard

Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output

HDMI
ASSIGNABLE

IN 4

RS232

IN 3

IN 2

OUT
MAIN

IN 1

OUT
SUB

COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR

IN 2

MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT

SIRIUS

OUT 1

Y
V

REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

DVD

MONITOR
OUT V

CB/PB

IR
A
IN

ZONE 2
OUT

12V TRIGGER OUT

ASSIGNABLE

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

IN 2

(VCR/DVR)

CR/PR
S

L
IN 3

OUT

FRONT

OUT

CENTER

SURR

(GAME/TV)

GND

BALANCE R

TAPE
BALANCE L
MONO

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

SURR R

VCR/DVR

(CD)

CENTER

1
3

OUT
HOT

GND

COLD

INPUT

L
OPTICAL
OUT

Y
PB
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

R
AUDIO
OUT

S VIDEO
OUT

SUBWOOFER

DVD

FRONT R

IN 2

VIDEO
OUT

Connect one
or the other
Satellite, cable, set-top box, etc.

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK

R
PHONO

IN 1

COAXIAL
OUT

B
FRONT

(CBL/SAT)

OPTICAL

A
SURR BACK

MULTI CH

FRONT L

a
SURR L

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT

SURR BACK L
Bi-AMP

PR-SC885_En.book Page 35 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued
Connecting Components with HDMI
About HDMI
Designed to meet the increased demands of digital TV, HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) is a new digital
interface standard for connecting TVs, projectors, DVD players, set-top boxes, and other video components. Until now,
several separate video and audio cables have been required to connect AV components. With HDMI, a single cable can
carry control signals, digital video, and up to eight channels of digital audio (2-channel PCM, multichannel digital
audio, or multichannel PCM).
The HDMI video stream (i.e., video signal) is compatible with DVI (Digital Visual Interface),*1 so TVs and displays
with a DVI input can be connected by using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable. (This may not work with some TVs and
displays, resulting in no picture.)
The AV controller uses HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), so only HDCP-compatible components
will display a picture.

The AV controller’s HDMI interface is based on the following standard:
High-Definition Multimedia Interface Specification Informational Version 1.3a

Supported Audio Formats
• 2-channel linear PCM (32–192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit)
• Multichannel linear PCM (7.1 ch, 32–192 kHz)
• Bitstream (DSD, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS, DTS-HD High Resolution, DTS-HD Master Audio)
Your DVD player must be able to output these formats from its HDMI OUT.

About Copyright Protection
The AV controller supports HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection),*2 a copy-protection system for digital
video signals. Other devices connected to the AV controller via HDMI must also support HDCP.
Use a commercially available HDMI cable (supplied with some components) to connect the AV controller’s HDMI OUT
MAIN or HDMI OUT SUB to the HDMI input on your TV or projector.

*1 DVI (Digital Visual Interface): The digital display interface standard set by the DDWG*3 in 1999.
*2 HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection): The video encryption technology developed by Intel for HDMI/DVI. It’s designed to
protect video content and requires a HDCP-compatible device to display the encrypted video.
*3 DDWG (Digital Display Working Group): Lead by Intel, Compaq, Fujitsu, Hewlett Packard, IBM, NEC, and Silicon Image, this open
industry group’s objective is to address the industry's requirements for a digital connectivity specification for high-performance PCs and
digital displays.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 36 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued
Making HDMI Connections
Step 1: Use HDMI cables to connect the AV controller’s HDMI jacks to your HDMI-compatible DVD player, TV,
projector, and so on.
Step 2: Assign each HDMI IN to an input selector. See “HDMI Input Setup” on page 47.
■ Video Signals
Digital video signals received by the HDMI IN jacks are normally output by the HDMI OUT MAIN or HDMI OUT
SUB for display on your TV. Composite video, S-Video, and component video sources can be upconverted for the
HDMI outputs. See “Video Connection Formats” on page 27 for more information.
■ Audio Signals
Digital audio signals received by the HDMI IN jacks are output by the speakers and headphones connected to the AV
controller. Normally, they are not output by the HDMI outputs, unless the HDMI Audio Out setting is set to On (see
page 107).
Hint!

To listen to audio received by the HDMI IN jacks through your TV’s speakers, set the HDMI Audio
Out setting to On (see page 107), and set your DVD player’s HDMI audio output setting to PCM.
When listening to audio from an HDMI component through the AV controller’s speakers, set the HDMI
component so that its video can be seen on your TV (e.g., on your TV, select the input to which the
HDMI component is connected). If your TV is not turned on or a different input is selected, the AV
controller’s speakers may produce no sound or the sound may be cut off.

Note:
• When the HDMI Audio Out setting is set to On (see page 107), or TV Control is set to Enable and you’re listening
through your TV’s speakers, if you turn up the AV controller’s volume control, the sound will be output by the AV
controller’s speakers. To stop the AV controller’s speakers producing sound, change the settings, change your TV’s
settings, or turn down the AV controller’s volume.
HDMI
OUT

HDMI
IN

TV
DVD player

HDMI

OUT
MAIN

IN 1

HDMI
ASSIGNABLE

IN 4

RS232

IN 3

IN 2

OUT
MAIN

IN 1

OUT
SUB

ETHERNET

COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR

IN 2

MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT

SIRIUS

OUT 1

Y
V

REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

DVD

MONITOR
OUT V

CB/PB

IR
A
IN

ZONE 2
OUT

12V TRIGGER OUT

ASSIGNABLE

ZONE 2

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

IN
IN 2

OUT

FRONT

OUT

CENTER

SURR

A
SURR BACK

B
FRONT

SW
CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK

(VCR/DVR)

L
IN 3

ZONE 3

CR/PR

(CBL/SAT)

OPTICAL

PHONO

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

GND

BALANCE R

TAPE

BALANCE L
MONO

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

SURR R

VCR/DVR

FRONT R

SUBWOOFER

DVD

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH

FRONT L

SURR L

PRE OUT

SURR BACK L
Bi-AMP

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

IN 2
(CD)

GND

OUT

HOT

COLD

INPUT

2
3

HOT

COLD

PRE OUT

PR-SC885_En.book Page 37 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued
Connecting a Game Console
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your game console ( A , B , or C ), and then make the connection.
If you use connection A , you must connect the AV controller to your TV with the same type of connection.
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your DVD player ( a , b , or c ), and then make the connection.
• With connection a , you can listen to and record audio from your game console or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection b . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use a
and b .)
Connection

AV controller

Signal flow

Game console

COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3

Component video output

Best

GAME/TV IN S

⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐

S-Video output

Better

Composite video output

Standard

GAME/TV IN V

GAME/TV IN L/R

DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1

Picture quality

Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output

HDMI
ASSIGNABLE

IN 4

RS232

IN 3

IN 2

OUT
MAIN

IN 1

OUT
SUB

COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR

IN 2

MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT

SIRIUS

OUT 1

Y
V

REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

DVD

VCR/DVR

MONITOR
OUT V

CB/PB

IR
A
IN

ZONE 2
OUT

12V TRIGGER OUT

ASSIGNABLE

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

CR/PR
S

IN
IN 2

IN 3

OUT

FRONT

CENTER

SURR

A
SURR BACK

B
FRONT

(VCR/DVR)

OUT

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK

(CBL/SAT)

OPTICAL

PHONO

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

GND

BALANCE R

TAPE
BALANCE L
MONO

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

SURR R

VCR/DVR

SUBWOOFER

DVD

FRONT R

CENTER

MULTI CH

FRONT L

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT

SURR L

IN 2
(CD)

1
3

OUT
HOT

GND

COLD

INPUT

L
OPTICAL
OUT

Y
PB
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

R
AUDIO
OUT

S VIDEO
OUT

VIDEO
OUT

Game Console

PR-SC885_En.book Page 38 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued
Connecting a Camcorder or Other AV Component
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your camcorder ( A or B ), and then make the connection.
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your camcorder ( a or b ), and then make the connection.

MASTER VOLUME

INPUT

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 1

AUX 2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

DISPLAY

DIGITAL

PUSH TO OPEN

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

STEREO

TUNING

THX
DIMMER

TUNING
MEMORY MODE

RETURN

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

SETUP
PRESET

CLEAR
DIGITAL INPUT

LISTENING MODE
TUNING

VIDEO

S VIDEO

ENTER

L AUDIO R

DIGITAL

a
L AUDIO R
INPUT

INPUT

VIDEO
INPUT

S VIDEO

S VIDEO
OUT

VIDEO
OUT

L AUDIO R
OUT

OPTICAL
OUT

Camcorder, etc.

Connection

AV controller

Signal flow

AUX 2 Input S Video

AUX 2 Input Video

⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐

AUX 2 Input L/R

AUX 2 Input Digital

Camcorder
S-Video output
Composite video output
Analog audio L/R output
Digital optical output

PR-SC885_En.book Page 39 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued
Connecting a CD Player
Step 1:
Choose a connection that matches your CD player ( a , b , or c ), and then make the connection.

HDMI

AC INLET

ASSIGNABLE

IN 4

RS232

IN 3

IN 2

OUT
MAIN

IN 1

OUT
SUB

IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR

IN 2

MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT

ETHERNET

COMPONENT VIDEO

SIRIUS

OUT 1

COAXIAL
IN 2

REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

MONITOR
OUT V

DVD

VCR/DVR

CB/PB

A
IN

ZONE 2
OUT

12V TRIGGER OUT

ASSIGNABLE

ZONE 2

(DVD)

CR/PR
S

IN
IN 2

IN 3

OUT

FRONT

OUT

CENTER

SURR

A
SURR BACK

B
FRONT

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK

(VCR/DVR)

(CBL/SAT)

ZONE 3

COAXIAL

IN 1

OPTICAL

PHONO

IN 1

OPTICAL

(GAME/TV)

GND

TAPE
BALANCE L

BALANCE R

MONO

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

VCR/DVR

SURR R

SUBWOOFER

DVD
CENTER

FRONT R

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH

PRE OUT

SURR L

FRONT L

IN 2
(CD)

1
3

IN 2

OUT
HOT

GND

COLD

INPUT

Connect one or the other

COAXIAL
OUT

OPTICAL
OUT

R
AUDIO
OUT

CD player

• With connection a , you can listen to and record audio from the CD player or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• To connect the CD player digitally, use connection b or c . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well,
use a and b , or a and c .)
Connection

AV controller

Signal flow

CD IN L/R

Analog audio L/R output

DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2

DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2

⇐
⇐
⇐

Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output

Connecting a Turntable
The AV controller’s PHONO IN is designed for use with
a moving magnet (MM) type cartridge.
HDMI

Use an analog audio cable to connect the AV controller’s
PHONO IN L/R jacks to the audio output on your turntable.

ASSIGNABLE

IN 4

RS232

IN 3

IN 2

OUT
MAIN

IN 1

OUT
SUB

ETHERNET

XM
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR

IN 2

MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT

SIRIUS

OUT 1

Y
V

REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

DVD

MONITOR
OUT V

CB/PB

IR
A
IN

ZONE 2
OUT

12V TRIGGER OUT

ASSIGNABLE

ZONE 2

COAXIAL

IN 1

Notes:
• If your turntable has a ground wire, connect it to the
AV controller’s GND screw. With some turntables,
connecting the ground wire may produce an audible
hum. If this happens, disconnect it.
• If your turntable has a moving coil (MC) type cartridge, you’ll need a commercially available MC head
amp or MC transformer. Connect your turntable to the
head amp or transformer, and connect that to the AV
controller’s PHONO IN L/R jacks.
• You can also use a phono equalizer to connect a turntable with an MC-type cartridge. See your phono
equalizer’s manual for details.

(DVD)

IN
IN 2

OUT

FRONT

OUT

CENTER

SURR

A
SURR BACK

B
FRONT

SURR L

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK

(VCR/DVR)

L
IN 3

ZONE 3

CR/PR

(CBL/SAT)

OPTICAL

PHONO

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

GND

BALANCE R

TAPE
BALANCE L
MONO

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

SURR R

VCR/DVR
FRONT R

SUBWOOFER

DVD
CENTER

(CD)

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH

FRONT L

IN 2

PRE OUT

1
3

OUT
HOT

GND

COLD

INPUT

R
PHONO

AUDIO
OUTPUT
L

PR-SC885_En.book Page 40 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued
Connecting a Cassette, CDR, MiniDisc, or DAT Recorder
Step 1:
Choose a connection that matches your recorder ( a , b , c , or d ), and then make the connection.

COAXIAL
IN 2

HDMI
ASSIGNABLE

IN 4

RS232

IN 3

IN 2

OUT
MAIN

IN 1

XM
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR

IN 2

MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT

AC INLET

OUT
SUB

ETHERNET

SIRIUS

OUT 1

Y
V

REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

DVD

MONITOR
OUT V

CB/PB

IR
A
IN

ZONE 2
OUT

TAPE
12V TRIGGER OUT

ASSIGNABLE

ZONE 2

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

IN 1

(DVD)

IN 2

(VCR/DVR)

IN 2

L
IN 3

OUT

FRONT

OUT

CENTER

SURR

A
SURR BACK

B
FRONT

SW
CENTER

SURR

OPTICAL

PHONO
(GAME/TV)

OPTICAL

GND

BALANCE R

TAPE

AUX 1

BALANCE L

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

SURR BACK R

MONO

Bi-AMP

VCR/DVR

SURR R

SUBWOOFER

DVD

CENTER

FRONT R

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH

PRE OUT

SURR L

FRONT L

IN 2
(CD)

SURR BACK

(CBL/SAT)

IN 1

ZONE 3

CR/PR

1
3

OUT
HOT

GND

TAPE

COLD

INPUT

Connect one
or the other

L
COAXIAL
OUT

OPTICAL
OUT

OPTICAL
IN

R
AUDIO
IN

R
AUDIO
OUT

Cassette, CDR, MD, etc.

• With connection a , you can play and record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• To connect the recorder digitally for playback, use connections a and b , or a and c .
• To connect the recorder digitally for recording, use connection d .
Connection

AV controller

TAPE IN L/R
TAPE OUT L/R

DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2

DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2

DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT

Signal flow

Cassette, CDR, MD, or DAT recorder

⇐
⇒
⇐
⇐
⇒

Analog audio L/R output
Analog audio L/R input
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output
Digital optical input

Connecting a Balanced Audio Source
You can connect a balanced audio source to the AV controller’s BALANCE L/R XLR jacks by using two XLR audio
cables. To use the balanced input, you must assign it to an input selector (see page 51). If you connect a mono source,
use the BALANCE L XLR jack and set the Balance Input setting to Mono (see page 51). The AV controller’s balanced
INPUT XLR jacks are wired as shown.
2

1
3

HOT

GND

COLD

Stereo audio source with
balanced XLR output

HDMI
ASSIGNABLE

IN 4

RS232

IN 3

IN 2

OUT
MAIN

IN 1

OUT
SUB

XM
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR

IN 2

MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT

SIRIUS

OUT 1

Y
V

REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

DVD

MONITOR
OUT V

CB/PB

IR
A
IN

ZONE 2
OUT

ASSIGNABLE

COAXIAL

IN 1

BALANCE R

CR/PR

BALANCE L

MONO

IN
IN 2

(DVD)

OUT

FRONT

OUT

CENTER

SURR

A
SURR BACK

B
FRONT

(VCR/DVR)

1
3

IN 3

(CBL/SAT)

OPTICAL

HOT

GND

COLD

INPUT

PHONO

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

GND

BALANCE R

IN 2
(CD)

1
3

OUT
HOT

GND

COLD

INPUT

TAPE
BALANCE L
MONO

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

SURR R

VCR/DVR
FRONT R

SUBWOOFER

DVD
CENTER

MULTI CH

FRONT L

SURR L

PR-SC885_En.book Page 41 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued
Connecting an RI Dock
■ If Your iPod Doesn’t Support Video:
Connect your RI Dock’s audio output jacks to the
AV controller’s GAME/TV IN L/R jacks.
(Onkyo DS-A2 hookup shown below.)

■ If Your iPod Supports Video:
Connect your RI Dock’s audio output jacks to the
AV controller’s GAME/TV IN L/R jacks, and connect its video output jack to the AV controller’s
GAME/TV IN V jack.
(Onkyo DS-A2 hookup shown below.)

IN
HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

IN 4

RS232

IN 3

IN 2

IN 1

XM
COMPONENT VIDEO

GAME/TV

IN 3

HDMI
IN 4

RS232

IN 3

IN 2

COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR

IN 2

MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT

GAME/TV

REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

SIRIUS

IN 1

(DVD)

IN 2

(VCR/DVR)

IN 3

(CBL/SAT)

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SA

CB/PB

ASSIGNABLE

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

IN 2

(VCR/DVR)

IN 3

(CBL/SAT)

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

CR/PR
IN

AUX 1

CB/PB

ASSIGNABLE

COAXIAL

OUT 1

REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

SIRIUS

OUT 1

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR

IN 2

MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT

CR/PR

OUT

OPTICAL
S

OUT

PHONO

IN 1

(GAME/TV)

GND

BALANCE R

TAPE
BALANCE L
MONO

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

SURR R

IN 2
(CD)

1
3

R
OUT

OPTICAL

PHONO

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

GND

GAME/TV

BALANCE R

HOT

TAPE
BALANCE L
MONO

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SA

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

GND

COLD

INPUT
SURR R

IN 2
(CD)

1
3

OUT
HOT

GND

COLD

INPUT

■ If you have an Onkyo DS-A1 RI Dock
• Connect its video output jack to the AV controller’s
GAME/TV IN S jack.
• Enter the appropriate remote control code before
using the AV controller’s remote controller for the first
time (see page 116).
Notes:
• Connect the RI Dock to the AV controller with an
cable (see page 42).
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to HDD or HDD/DOCK.
• Set the AV controller’s Input Display to DOCK (see page 49).
• See the RI Dock’s instruction manual for more information.

Connecting the Power Cords of Other Components
The AV controller has AC outlets on its rear panel that can be used to
connect the power cords of other components that you intend to use with
the AV controller. These components can then be left turned on so that
they turn on and off as and when the AV controller is set to On or
Standby.

AC INLET

AC OUTLET
AC 120V 60Hz
SWITCHED
120W 1A MAX.

Caution:
• Make sure that the total capacity of the components that you connect
to the AC OUTLETS does not exceed the stated capacity (e.g., TOTAL
120 W).
Note:
• When the HDMI Control setting is set to Enable (page 107), the AC
AC OUTLET
outlets are on all the time regardless of whether the AV controller is
set to On or Standby, or Ready mode in this case, so any components
connected to them cannot be turned on or off automatically.
• Onkyo components connected via
should be connected directly to a wall outlet, not an AC OUTLET on the AV
controller.
AC 120V 60Hz
SWITCHED
120W 1A MAX.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 42 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued
Connecting Onkyo

Components

Step 1: Make sure that each Onkyo component is connected to the AV controller with an analog audio cable (RCA).
Step 2: Make the necessary

connections (see illustration below).

Step 3: If you’re using an MD, CDR, or RI DOCK component, change the Input Display (see page 49).

With

(Remote Interactive), you can use the following special functions:

Auto Power On/Standby

When you start playback on a component connected via
, if the AV controller is on Standby, it will automatically
turn on and select that component as the input source. Similarly, when the AV controller is set to Standby, all components connected via
will also go on Standby. This function will not work with components that are connected to an
AC OUTLET on the AV controller.
Direct Change

When playback is started on a component connected via
, the AV controller automatically selects that component as
the input source. If your DVD player is connected to the AV controller’s multichannel input, you’ll need to press the
[AUDIO SEL] button repeatedly and select Multich to hear all channels (see page 78), as the Direct Change
function selects the DVD IN L/R jacks.
Remote Control

You can use the AV controller’s remote controller to control your other
-capable Onkyo components. You must enter
the appropriate remote control code first (see page 117). And remember to point the remote controller at the AV controller and not the other component.
Notes:
• Use only
cables for
connections.
cables
are supplied with Onkyo players (DVD, CD, etc.).
• Some components have two
jacks. You can connect either one to the AV controller. The other jack is
for connecting additional
-capable components.
• Connect only Onkyo components to
jacks. Connecting other manufacturer’s components may cause
a malfunction.
• Some components may not support all
functions.
Refer to the manuals supplied with your other Onkyo
components.
• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is on, the Auto Power
On/Standby and Direct Change
functions do not
work.

IN
L
R
HDMI

AC INLET

ASSIGNABLE

IN 4

RS232

IN 3

IN 2

OUT
MAIN

IN 1

COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR

IN 2

OUT
SUB

ETHERNET

XM
MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT

SIRIUS

OUT 1

Y
V

REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

DVD

MONITOR
OUT V

CB/PB

IR
A
IN

ZONE 2
OUT

12V TRIGGER OUT

ASSIGNABLE

ZONE 2

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

IN 2

(VCR/DVR)

IN 3

(CBL/SAT)

ZONE 3

CR/PR
S

OUT

FRONT

OUT

CENTER

SURR

A
SURR BACK

B
FRONT

FRONT
SW

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK

OPTICAL

REMOTE
CONTROL

PHONO

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

GND

BALANCE R

TAPE
BALANCE L
MONO

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

SURR R

VCR/DVR
FRONT R

SUBWOOFER

DVD
CENTER

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH

FRONT L

PRE OUT

SURR L

IN 2
(CD)

1
3

OUT
HOT

GND

COLD

INPUT

DVD

e.g., CD player
R
L
ANALOG
AUDIO OUT

e.g., DVD player
R
L
ANALOG
AUDIO OUT

Connecting the Power Cord
•
•
•
•

Before connecting the power cord, connect all your speakers and AV components.
Connect the power cord to the AV controller’s AC INLET.
Plug the other end of the power cord into a suitable wall outlet.
Turning on the AV controller may cause a momentary power surge that might interfere with other electrical equipment
on the same circuit. If this is a problem, plug the AV controller into a different branch circuit.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 43 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Turning On the AV Controller
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY indicator

STANDBY
ON

STANDBY

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

INPUT

MASTER VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

STANDBY
ZONE 2
ZONE 3

PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 2

AUX 1

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

PUSH TO OPEN

ZONE 2
PHONES

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

STEREO

TUNING

THX
TUNING
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE

POWER

RETURN

+10

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

SETUP

CLEAR

OFF

DIGITAL INPUT

ZONE 3

LISTENING MODE
TUNING

9
D. TUN

ENTER

S VIDEO

VIDEO

L AUDIO R

TV VOL

CLEAR

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

PRESET

DISPLAY

DIGITAL

MACRO

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

CABLE

ZONE2

CDR/MD

RECEIVER

POWER

SAT
DIMMER

DOCK

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP

Turning On and Standby
On the AV controller, press the [STANDBY/ON] button.
Remote
controller

AV controller
STANDBY/ON

RECEIVER

On the remote controller, press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE button,
followed by the [ON] button.
The AV controller comes on, the display lights up, and the STANDBY indicator goes
off.
Pressing the remote controller’s [ON] button again will turn on any components connected via
.
To turn the AV controller off, press the [STANDBY/ON] button, or press the remote
controller’s [STANDBY] button. The AV controller will enter Standby mode. To prevent any loud surprises the next time you turn on the AV controller, turn down the
volume before you turn it off.

Up and Running in a Few Easy Steps
To get your system up and running with the minimum of fuss, here’s a few pointers to help you configure the AV
controller before you use it for the very first time. These settings only need to be made once.
■ Do the automatic speaker setup—this is essential!
See “Automatic Speaker Setup (Audyssey MultEQ XT)” on page 52.
■ Did you connect your TV to an HDMI OUT or COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1 or 2?
If you did, see “HDMI Monitor Setup” on page 45.
■ Did you connect a component to an HDMI input,
component video input, or digital audio input?
If you did, see “HDMI Input Setup” on page 47, “Component Video
Input Setup” on page 48, or “Digital Input Setup” on page 49 respectively.
■ Did you connect an Onkyo MD recorder, CD recorder, or RI
Dock?
If you did, see “Changing the Input Display” on page 49.

HDMI

OUT

TAPE

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

MD recorder, CD recorder,
RI Dock

PR-SC885_En.book Page 44 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

First Time Setup
This section explains the settings that you need to make before using the AV controller for the very first time.

Speaker Settings
GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

5
6
If you change these 4settings,
you-must run the auto8
9
matic speaker setup 7again
(see
page 52).
TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

D. TUN

+10

ENTER

TV VOL

CLEAR

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

2-1.Speaker Settings

MACRO

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “1. Speaker Settings,” and then press [ENTER].
The Speaker Settings menu appears.

Speakers Type

ZONE3

Normal

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

CABLE

ZONE2

CDR/MD
DOCK

SAT

TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

2, 3

U
MEN

MEN
U

2–5

+
ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

PREV
CH

ENTER

SLEEP
P
TO

1, 6

RECEIVER

ID E

TUP

VOL

T
E XI

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

MUTING

ENTER

REC

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

If you’ve fed your front speakers from the FRONT L/R
and SURR BACK L/R outputs for bi-amping, you must
change the Speaker Type setting. For hookup information, see “Bi-amping the Front Speakers” on page 23.
Notes:
• When bi-amping is used, the AV controller is able to
feed up to 5.1 speakers in the main room.
• Before you change these settings, turn down the volume.

1
RECEIVER

TUP

2
ENTER

ENTER

Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “2. Speaker
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Speaker Setup menu appears.

5
SE

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Speaker Type,”
and use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
Normal: Select this if you’ve connected your front speakers
normally.
Bi-Amp: Select this if you’ve connected your front speakers for
bi-amped operation.
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.

TUP

Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV controller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 45 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

First Time Setup—Continued
HDMI Monitor Setup

2
ENTER

STANDBY

DVD

VCR/DVR

TV
INPUT
CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

CLEAR

PHONO

D. TUN

+10

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “1. Input/Output
Assign,” and then press
[ENTER].
The Input/Output Assign menu
appears.

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

ENTER

TV VOL

MACRO

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

ZONE2

CDR/MD
TV

CABLE

DOCK

SAT

2, 3

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

SLEEP

DIMMER
P
TO

U
MEN

ENTER

2–5

MEN
U

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “1. Monitor
Out,” and then press [ENTER].
The Monitor Out menu appears.

+
CH

1, 6

PREV
CH

ID E

TUP

E XI

HDMI Monitor
Resolution
Monitor Out2

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

REC

1-1.Monitor Out

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

MUTING

PLAYLIST

Main

ENTER

RANDOM

LISTENING MODE
STEREO

SURR

REPEAT

AUDIO

PURE A

DIRECT

SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
THX

ALL ST

If you connect your TV to the COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT 1 or COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT, set the HDMI Monitor setting to No so that the onscreen setup menus are displayed
and composite video and S-Video sources are upconverted and output by the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1 and COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR
OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT.
If you connect your TV to the HDMI OUT MAIN or
HDMI OUT SUB, set the HDMI Monitor setting to
Main or Sub, respectively, so that the onscreen setup
menus are displayed and composite video, S-Video, and
component video sources are upconverted and output by
the HDMI OUT MAIN or HDMI OUT SUB.
You can specify the output resolution for the HDMI outputs and COMPONENT VIDEO outputs and have the
AV controller upconvert the picture resolution as necessary to match the resolution supported by your TV.

1
RECEIVER

Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

4
ENTER

ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “HDMI Monitor,”
and use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
No: Select this if your TV is connected to the COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1,
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT 2/ZONE 2
OUT, S MONITOR OUT, or
V MONITOR OUT.
Main: Select this if your TV is connected to the HDMI OUT
MAIN.
Sub: Select this if your TV is connected to the HDMI OUT
SUB.
Note:
• When Main or Sub is selected, the
onscreen setup menus are output by
only the HDMI outputs. If you’re
not using the HDMI outputs and
select Main or Sub by mistake and
the menus disappear, press the AV
controller’s [HDMI OUT] button
so that “HDMI Monitor: No”
appears on the display.

TUP

PR-SC885_En.book Page 46 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

First Time Setup—Continued

5
ENTER

ENTER

6
ENTER

ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Resolution,”
and use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
Through:Select this to pass video
through the AV controller at
the same resolution and with
no conversion.
Auto: Select this to have the AV
controller automatically convert video at resolutions not
supported by your TV. (Not
available when the HDMI
Monitor setting is set to No.)
480p: Select this for 480p output
and video conversion as necessary.
720p: Select this for 720p output
and video conversion as necessary.
1080i: Select this for 1080i output
and video conversion as necessary.
1080p: Select this for 1080p output
and video conversion as necessary. (Not available when
the HDMI Monitor setting is
set to No.)
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Monitor Out2,”
and use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
Monitor:Select this if you’ve connected the COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR
OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT to a TV
or other component in your
main room.
Zone 2: Select this if you’ve connected the COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR
OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT to a TV
in Zone 2.
When Monitor is selected, the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR
OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT outputs the same
video as the COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT 1.

Notes:
• If the video source contains information that restricts
output at high-resolutions, 720p or 1080i content will
not be converted.

• See page 27 for charts showing how the HDMI Monitor setting affects the video signal flow through the AV
controller.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV controller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.

Using the HDMI OUT Button
The HDMI Monitor setting can also be set to No, Main,
or Sub by using the [HDMI OUT] button on the AV controller.

1, 2
MASTER VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

STANDBY
ZONE 2
ZONE 3

PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 1

AUX 2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

ZONE 2
PHONES

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

STEREO

TUNING

THX

POWER

RT/PTY/TP MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

RETURN

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

SETUP
PRESET

CLEAR

OFF

ZONE 3

DIGITAL INPUT

LISTENING MODE
TUNING

1
HDMI OUT

2
HDMI OUT

ENTER

S VIDEO

VIDEO

L AUDIO R

DIGITAL

Press the [HDMI OUT] button.
The current setting is displayed.

Press the [HDMI OUT] button
repeatedly to select:
No: Select this if your TV is connected to the COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR OUT, S
MONITOR OUT, or V MONITOR OUT.
Main: Select this if your TV is connected to the HDMI OUT
MAIN.
Sub: Select this if your TV is connected to the HDMI OUT
SUB.
Note:
• When Main or Sub is selected, the
onscreen setup menus are output by
only the HDMI outputs. If you’re
not using the HDMI outputs and
select Main or Sub by mistake and
the menus disappear, press the
[HDMI OUT] button to select No.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 47 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

First Time Setup—Continued

HDMI Input Setup
1

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

ENTER
ZONE2

CDR/MD
TV

CABLE

DOCK

SAT

2, 3

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

P
TO

U
MEN

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

1, 5

PREV
CH

1-2.HDMI Input

2–4

MEN
U

+
-

SLEEP

DIMMER

ID E

TUP

ENTER

VOL

T
E XI

4
ENTER

By default, none of the HDMI inputs are assigned. The
following input selectors can be assigned: DVD,
VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV, AUX 1, AUX 2.
If you’ve connected your TV to the AV controller with an
HDMI cable, you can set the AV controller so that composite video, S-Video, and component video sources are
upconverted (*) and output by the HDMI outputs. You
can set this for each input selector by selecting the
“- - -” option.
Composite video, S-Video,
component video

ENTER

HDMI

IN
(*)
OUT
Composite video, S-Video,
component video

5
SE

HDMI

Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

TUP

2
ENTER

ENTER

-------------

MUTING

If you connect a video component to an HDMI IN, you
must assign that input to an input selector. For example,
if you connect your DVD player to HDMI IN 1, you
must assign HDMI IN 1 to the DVD input selector.

RECEIVER

DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX1
AUX2

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “2. HDMI Input,”
and then press [ENTER].
The HDMI Input menu appears.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “1. Input/Output
Assign,” and then press
[ENTER].
The Input/Output Assign menu
appears.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an input selector, and use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
IN1: Select if the video component
is connected to HDMI IN 1.
IN2: Select if the video component
is connected to HDMI IN 2.
IN3: Select if the video component
is connected to HDMI IN 3.
IN4: Select if the video component
is connected to HDMI IN 4.
- - -: Select this to upconvert and
output composite video,
S-Video, and component
video sources from the HDMI
OUT.
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.

TUP

Notes:
• Each HDMI IN cannot be assigned to more than one
input selector.
• For composite video, S-Video, and component
video upconversion for the HDMI OUT MAIN or
HDMI OUT SUB, the HDMI Monitor setting must
be set to Main or Sub (see page 45). See page 27 for
more information on video signal flow and upconversion.
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector as
explained here, the digital audio input for that input
selector is automatically set to the same HDMI IN.
See “Digital Input Setup” on page 49.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV controller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 48 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

First Time Setup—Continued
Component Video Input Setup

INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO

ZONE3

ENTER

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

ZONE2

CDR/MD
TV

CABLE

DOCK

SAT

2, 3

MEN
U

2–4

+
-

1-3.Component Video Input
ENTER

PREV
CH

SLEEP
ENU
PM

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

1, 5

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

ID E

TUP

E XI

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

4
ENTER

By default, the DVD input selector is assigned to COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1, and all of the other input selectors (i.e., VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV, AUX 1,
AUX 2, TAPE, CD, PHONO) are assigned to the “- - -”
option.
If you’ve connected your TV to the AV controller with a
component video cable, you can set the AV controller so
that composite video and S-Video sources are upconverted (*) and output by the COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT 1 or 2. You can set this for each input
selector by selecting the “- - -” option.
Composite video, S-Video

ENTER

Component video

(* )

OUT
Composite video, S-Video

RECEIVER

ENTER

IN1
-----------

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an input selector, and use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
IN1: Select if the video component
is connected to COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1.
IN2: Select if the video component
is connected to COMPONENT VIDEO IN 2.
IN3: Select if the video component
is connected to COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3.
- - -: Select to output composite
video and S-Video sources
from the COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT.
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.

TUP

Component video

Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

TUP

DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX1
AUX2

MUTING

If you connect a video component to a COMPONENT
VIDEO IN, you must assign that input to an input
selector. For example, if you connect your DVD player
to COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3, you must assign COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3 to the DVD input selector.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “3. Component
Video Input,” and then press
[ENTER].
The Component Video Input menu
appears.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “1. Input/Output
Assign,” and then press [ENTER].
The Input/Output Assign menu
appears.

Notes:
• For composite video and S-Video upconversion for
the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1 or
2, the HDMI Monitor setting must be set to Main
or Sub (see page 45). See page 27 for more information on video signal flow and upconversion.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV controller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 49 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

First Time Setup—Continued
Changing the Input Display

Digital Input Setup

If you connect an
-capable Onkyo MiniDisc
recorder, CD recorder, or RI Dock to the TAPE IN/OUT
jacks, or connect an RI Dock to the GAME/TV jacks, for
to work properly, you must change this setting.

0
11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

ZONE2

CD
CDR/MD

This setting can only be changed on the AV controller.

1, 2

MACRO

CABLE

DOCK

SAT

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

2, 3

1, 2

P
TO

U
MEN

2–4

1, 5

PREV
CH

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

STANDBY/ON

MEN
U

MASTER VOLUME

SLEEP

ID E

TUP

E XI

RN
RE T U

STANDBY

DISPLAY

ZONE 2

MUTING

ZONE 3

PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 1

AUX 2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

ZONE 2
PHONES

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

STEREO

TUNING

THX

POWER

RT/PTY/TP MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

RETURN

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

SETUP

REC

PRESET

RANDOM

PLAYLIST

CLEAR

OFF

ZONE 3

DIGITAL INPUT

LISTENING MODE
TUNING

ENTER

S VIDEO

VIDEO

L AUDIO R

DIGITAL

LISTENING MODE

Press the [TAPE] or [GAME/TV]
input selector button so that
“TAPE” or “GAME/TV” appears
on the display.

If you connect a component to a digital audio input, you
must assign that input to an input selector. For example,
if you connect your CD player to OPTICAL IN 2, you
must assign OPTICAL IN 2 to the CD input selector.
These are the default assignments.
Input selector

Audio input

DVD

COAX1

VCR/DVR

COAX2

CBL/SAT

COAX3

GAME/TV

OPT1

AUX 1

---

AUX 2

FRONT (Fixed)

TAPE

GAME/TV

2
TAPE

Press and hold down the [TAPE]
or [GAME/TV] input selector button (about 3 seconds) to change
the setting.
Repeat this step to select MD, CDR, or
DOCK.
For the Tape input selector, the setting
changes in this order:

-----

OPT2

PHONO

---

RECEIVER

→

TAPE → MD → CDR
DOCK

Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

→

GAME/TV

TAPE
TUNER

For the GAME/TV input selector, the
setting changes in this order:

TUP

GAME/TV ↔ DOCK
Note:
• DOCK can be selected for the TAPE input selector or
GAME/TV input selector, but not both at the same
time.

2
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “1. Input/Output
Assign,” and then press [ENTER].
The Input/Output Assign menu
appears.

ENTER

PR-SC885_En.book Page 50 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

First Time Setup—Continued
Using the DIGITAL INPUT Button

3
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “4. Digital
Input,” and then press [ENTER].
The Digital Input menu appears.

Digital inputs can also be assigned to input selectors by
using the [DIGITAL INPUT] button on the AV controller.

1-4.Digital Input

ENTER

DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX1
AUX2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO

COAX1
COAX2
COAX3
OPT1
--FRONT
----OPT2
---

MASTER VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

STANDBY
ZONE 2
ZONE 3

PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

DVD

CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

GAME/TV

AUX 1

TAPE

AUX 2

TUNER

PHONO

DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

ZONE 2
PHONES

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

STEREO

TUNING

THX

POWER

RT/PTY/TP MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

RETURN

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

SETUP
PRESET

CLEAR

OFF

DIGITAL INPUT

ZONE 3

LISTENING MODE
TUNING

4
ENTER

ENTER

5
SE

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an input selector, and then use the Left and
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
COAX1: Select if the component is
connected to DIGITAL
COAXIAL IN 1.
COAX2: Select if the component is
connected to DIGITAL
COAXIAL IN 2.
COAX3: Select if the component is
connected to DIGITAL
COAXIAL IN 3.
OPT1: Select if the component is
connected to DIGITAL
OPTICAL IN 1.
OPT2: Select if the component is
connected to DIGITAL
OPTICAL IN 2.
- - -: Select if the component is
connected to an analog
input.
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.

VIDEO

L AUDIO R

DIGITAL

Press the input selector button
for the input selector that you
want to assign.

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 1

AUX 2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

Press the [DIGITAL INPUT]
button.
The current assignment is displayed.

DIGITAL INPUT

3
DIGITAL INPUT

S VIDEO

2, 3

TUP

Notes:
• Only FRONT can be assigned to the AUX 2 input
selector.
• The TUNER input selector cannot be assigned and is
fixed at the “- - -” option.
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector in
“HDMI Video Setup” on page 47, this input assignment is automatically set to the same HDMI IN. And
in addition to the usual inputs (e.g., COAX1, COAX2,
etc.), you can also select HDMI inputs.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV controller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.

ENTER

Press the [DIGITAL INPUT] button repeatedly to select an
option.
Available options are the same as for
the Digital Input menu. See step 4 on
page 50.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 51 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

First Time Setup—Continued
Analog Input Setup

INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO

ZONE3

ENTER

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

ZONE2

CD
CDR/MD

CABLE

RECEIVER

DOCK

SAT

TAPE/AMP

2, 3

P
TO

U
MEN

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

1, 5

MEN
U

2–4

+
PREV
CH

SLEEP

DIMMER

ID E

TUP

VOL

T
E XI

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

MUTING

If you connect a component to the AV controller’s analog
multichannel input, you must assign that input to an
input selector. For example, if you connect your DVD
player to the MULTI CH input, you must assign it to the
DVD input selector.
If you connect a component to the AV controller’s balanced input, you must assign that input to an input
selector. For example, if you connect your CD player to
the BALANCED input, you must assign it to the CD
input selector.

1
RECEIVER

ENTER

Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

ENTER

TUP

2
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “1. Input/Output
Assign,” and then press [ENTER].
The Input/Output Assign menu
appears.

ENTER

3
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Multich,” and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an input selector.
You can assign the multichannel input
to the following input selectors: DVD,
VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV,
AUX 1, AUX 2, TAPE, CD, or
PHONO.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “5. Analog
Input,” and then press [ENTER].
The Analog Input menu appears.

7
SE

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Balance,” and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an input selector.
You can assign the balanced input to the
following input selectors: DVD,
VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV,
AUX 1, AUX 2, TAPE, CD, or
PHONO.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Balance Input,”
and use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
Stereo: Select if the source is stereo
and you’ve connected it to
the BALANCED L and R
INPUT XLR jacks.
Mono: Select if the source is mono
and you’ve connected it to
the BALANCED L INPUT
XLR jack.
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.

TUP

Notes:
• To listen to the component connected to the multichannel input, press the [AUDIO SEL] button repeatedly to select Multich (see page 78).
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV controller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.

1-5.Analog Input
Multich
Balance
Balance Input

DVD

ENTER

PR-SC885_En.book Page 52 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

First Time Setup—Continued
Using Audyssey MultEQ XT

Automatic Speaker Setup
(Audyssey MultEQ XT)
With the supplied speaker setup microphone, Audyssey
MultEQ XT can measure the number of speakers connected, their sizes, crossover frequencies, and distances
from the listening position and calculate the optimal
speaker settings for you automatically.
Before using this function, connect and position all of
your speakers.

Measurement Positions
To create a listening environment in which several
people can enjoy your home theater simultaneously,
Audyssey MultEQ XT takes measurements at up to eight
positions within the listening area.
■ 1st measurement position
This is the center position of your listening area, or
the listening position if there’s only one listener.
■ 2nd–8th measurement positions
These are the other listening positions (i.e., the
places where the other listeners will sit). You can
measure up to eight positions.

Notes:
• If the AV controller is muted, it will be unmuted
automatically when the automatic speaker setup
starts.
• Automatic speaker setup cannot be performed
while a pair of headphones is connected.
• It takes about 15 minutes to complete the automatic speaker setup for three positions. Total measurement time varies depending on the number of
positions and speakers.
• Do not disconnect the speaker setup microphone
during the automatic speaker setup, unless you
want to cancel the setup.
• Do not connect or disconnect any speakers during
the automatic speaker setup.

1
MASTER VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

STANDBY

The following examples show some typical home theater
seating arrangements. Choose the one that best matches
yours, and position the microphone accordingly when
prompted.
TV

ZONE 2
ZONE 3

PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 2

AUX 1

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

ZONE 2
PHONES

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

STEREO

TUNING

THX

POWER

RT/PTY/TP MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

RETURN

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

SETUP
PRESET

CLEAR

OFF

ZONE 3

DIGITAL INPUT

LISTENING MODE

S VIDEO

ENTER

TUNING

VIDEO

L AUDIO R

DIGITAL

2, 9

SETUP MIC
ON

STANDBY

TV
INPUT

DVD

VCR/DVR

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

D. TUN

+10

PHONO

CBL/SAT

1
GAME/TV

TV VOL

CLEAR

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

MACRO

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

CABLE

ZONE2

CDR/MD
DOCK

SAT

TAPE/AMP
SLEEP

DIMMER

ENTER

RECEIVER

P
TO

U
MEN

MEN
U

+
TV

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

PREV
CH

ID E

TUP

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

REC

: Listening area
: Listening position

VOL

T
E XI

MUTING

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

PR-SC885_En.book Page 53 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

First Time Setup—Continued

Turn on the AV controller and the
connected TV.
On the TV, select the input to which the
AV controller is connected.

2
SETUP MIC

The speaker detect results
appear.

FL
SL
SBL
C

Place the setup microphone at
the 1st measurement position,
and connect it to the SETUP MIC
jack.
Auto Speaker Setup

: Yes
: Yes
: Yes
: No

FR
SR
SBR
SW

:
:
:
:

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Next
Retry
Cancel

AUDYSSEY

“Yes” means that the speaker was
detected. “No” means that no speaker
was detected.

Please place microphone at center
of listening area at ear height.

Push Enter : Next

ENTER

Notes:
• Make sure the microphone is horizontal.
• If there’s an obstacle between the
microphone and any speaker, the
automatic setup will not work correctly. Set up the room as you would
when enjoying a DVD movie.
• Positioning the microphone close to
where your ears would normally be
will provide the best results. You can
set the height of the microphone by
using a tripod or level table.

AUDYSSEY

Auto Speaker Setup

-----SP Detect Result-----

ENTER

If you agree with the results, use
the Up and Down [ ]/[ ] buttons to select Next, and then
press [ENTER].
The options are:
Next: Proceed to the next step.
Retry: Return to step 2 and try again.
Cancel: Cancel the automatic speaker
setup.
The following screen appears.
Auto Speaker Setup

AUDYSSEY

Please place microphone at
2nd Position at ear height.

Push Enter : Next

Press [ENTER].
Auto Speaker Setup

AUDYSSEY

ENTER

Do not unplug microphone.

ENTER

Please keep quiet.

Now Measuring...

Auto Speaker Setup

A test tone is output by each speaker in
turn, as Audyssey MultEQ XT determines which speakers are connected.
This takes a few minutes.
Note:
• If any extraneous noise is picked up
by the microphone, the automatic
setup may not work correctly, so
keep quiet.

Place the setup microphone at
the next position (see page 52),
and then press [ENTER].
Audyssey MultEQ XT performs more
measurements. This takes a few minutes.
AUDYSSEY

Do not unplug microphone.
Please keep quiet.

Now Measuring...

When prompted, place the setup
microphone at the next position,
and repeat step 5.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 54 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

First Time Setup—Continued

After the 3rd and 7th measurements,
the following screen appears.
ENTER

Auto Speaker Setup

Review SP Distance: Review the
speaker distance settings (see
“Reviewing the Results” on
page 56).
Review SP Level: Review the speaker
level settings (see “Reviewing
the Results” on page 56).
Cancel: Cancel the automatic speaker
setup.

AUDYSSEY

Please select “Next”, when measuring
next position, and select “finish”,
when ending.
Next
finish(Calculate)
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an option, and
then press [ENTER].
Next: Select this if you want to measure another listening position. After the 8th
measurement has been taken,
the procedure automatically
proceeds to step 8.
Finish (Calculate): Select this if you
don’t want to measure any
more listening positions and
are ready to calculate the
results, then go to step 8.

If you selected “Save,” the results are
saved, and the following screen
appears.
Auto Speaker Setup

Saving...

Disconnect the setup microphone.
Auto Speaker Setup

When the measurements are
complete, the following screen
appears.
Auto Speaker Setup

AUDYSSEY

Please unplug microphone.

AUDYSSEY

Calculating...

When the calculations are complete, the following screen
appears.

Notes:
• When the automatic speaker setup is complete, the
Equalizer Settings (page 99) will be set to Audyssey.
• You can cancel the automatic speaker setup at any
point in the procedure simply by disconnecting the
setup microphone.

ENTER

Auto Speaker Setup

AUDYSSEY

Save
Review SP Config
Review SP Distance
Review SP Level
Cancel
ENTER

Error Messages
During the automatic speaker setup, one of the following
error messages may appear:
❑ Ambient noise is too high
Auto Speaker Setup

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an option, and
then press [ENTER].
Save: Save the calculated settings
and exit the automatic
speaker setup.
Review SP Config: Review the
speaker configuration settings
(see “Reviewing the Results”
on page 56).

AUDYSSEY

Ambient noise is too high.

Retry
Cancel

This message appears if there’s too much background
noise and the measurements cannot be performed properly. Remove the source of the noise and try again, or
cancel the automatic speaker setup.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 55 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

First Time Setup—Continued
❑ Speaker Detect Error
-----Speaker Detect Error-----

-----Speaker Detect Error----FL
SL
SBL
C

: Yes
: Yes
: Yes
: No

FR
SR
SBR
SW

:
:
:
:

AUDYSSEY

Auto Speaker Setup

AUDYSSEY

Auto Speaker Setup

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

FL
SL
SBL
C

:
:
:
:

Error
Yes
Yes
Yes

FR
SR
SBR
SW

:
:
:
:

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Retry
Cancel

This message appears if a speaker is not detected. “Yes”
means that a speaker was detected. “No” means that no
speaker was detected. Check your speaker connections
and retry, or cancel the automatic speaker setup.

There is a problem with a speaker. The speaker may be
broken or the subwoofer may be emitting sound that is
too high.
Auto Speaker Setup

AUDYSSEY

Auto Speaker Setup

-----Speaker Detect Error----FL
SL
SBL
C

:
:
:
:

Yes
----Yes

FR
SR
SBR
SW

AUDYSSEY

: No
: --: --: ---

Retry
Cancel

Speaker Detect Error

Retry
Cancel

A different number of speakers has been detected.

One of the front speakers has not been detected.

❑ Writing Error
Auto Speaker Setup

Auto Speaker Setup

AUDYSSEY

-----Speaker Detect Error----FL
SL
SBL
C

:
:
:
:

Yes
----Yes

FR
SR
SBR
SW

: Yes
: No
: --: ---

Retry
Cancel

One of the surround speakers has not been detected.
AUDYSSEY

Auto Speaker Setup

-----Speaker Detect Error----FL
SL
SBL
C

:
:
:
:

Yes
----Yes

FR
SR
SBR
SW

Writing Error!

Retry
Cancel

This message appears if saving fails. Try saving again, or
cancel the automatic speaker setup.
If this message appears repeatedly, the AV controller
may be malfunctioning and you should contact the
dealer from whom you purchased this unit.

: Yes
: No
: Yes
: ---

Retry
Cancel

The surround back speakers have been detected but the
surround speakers haven’t.
AUDYSSEY

Auto Speaker Setup

-----Speaker Detect Error----FL
SL
SBL
C

: Yes
: --: No
: Yes

FR
SR
SBR
SW

:
:
:
:

Yes
Yes
Yes
---

Retry
Cancel

The right surround back speaker has been detected but
the left surround back speaker hasn’t.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 56 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

First Time Setup—Continued
Changing the Speaker Settings Manually

Reviewing the Results

ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select the settings that
you want to review, and then
press [ENTER].
Auto Speaker Setup

ENTER

AUDYSSEY

Save
Review SP Config
Review SP Distance
Review SP Level
Cancel

The options are:
Review SP Config
Review the speaker configuration
settings.
Auto Speaker Setup

AUDYSSEY

Review SP Config
Subwoofer
Front
Center
Surround
Surr Back
Surr Back Ch

:
:
:
:
:
:

Yes
Full Band
80Hz
100Hz
150Hz
2ch

Review SP Distance
Review the speaker distance settings.
Auto Speaker Setup

AUDYSSEY

Review SP Distance
Left
Center
Right
Surr Right
Surr Back R
Surr Back L
Surr Left
Subwoofer

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

15ft
15ft
15ft
7ft
7ft
7ft
7ft
15ft

Review SP Level
Review the speaker level settings.
Auto Speaker Setup

AUDYSSEY

Review SP Level
Left
Center
Right
Surr Right
Surr Back R
Surr Back L
Surr Left
Subwoofer

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

+12dB
0dB
–12dB
+3dB
+4dB
-6dB
-3dB
0dB

Press [RETURN] to return to the previous screen.

In some cases, the measurements taken by the automatic
speaker setup may not provide usable results. If running
the speaker setup a second time doesn’t help, you’ll have
to set the speaker settings manually (see pages 94–99).
Notes:
• For THX-certified speakers, the 80 Hz (THX) crossover frequency is recommended. If you use the automatic speaker setup, you’ll need to manually select
80 Hz (THX) for each THX-certified speaker (see
page 94).
• Because of the complexities of low-frequency sounds
and the way they interact with a room, THX recommends setting the subwoofer level and distance manually.

Using a Powered Subwoofer
If you’re using a powered subwoofer, as it outputs very
low-frequency sound and its position is usually low
down, it may not be detected by the automatic speaker
setup. In this case, increase the subwoofer’s volume,
select its highest crossover frequency, and then try running the automatic speaker setup again. Note that if the
volume is set too high and the sound distorts, it may not
be detected, so use an appropriate volume level. If the
subwoofer has a low-pass filter switch, set it to Off or
Direct. Refer to your subwoofer’s instruction manual for
details.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 57 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Playing Your AV Components
Basic AV Controller Operation

STANDBY

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

TV
INPUT

3
MASTER VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

PHONO

D. TUN

+10

STANDBY

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

ZONE 2
ZONE 3

TV VOL

CLEAR
12

MACRO
PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 1

AUX 2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

DISPLAY

ZONE3

PUSH TO OPEN

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

CABLE

ZONE2

CDR/MD
DOCK

SAT

TAPE/AMP

DIMMER
U
MEN

MEN
U

+
CH

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

PREV
CH
DISPLAY

SLEEP
P
TO

RECEIVER

ID E

TUP

VOL

T
E XI

RN
RE T U
MUTING

Use the AV controller’s input selector buttons to select an input source.

AV controller

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 1

AUX 2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

Remote
controller

To select an input source with the remote controller, press its
[RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE button, and then use its INPUT SELECTOR
buttons.

RECEIVER

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

+10

Start playback on the source component.
To watch a DVD or other video source, on your TV, select the video input that’s connected to the AV controller’s COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1, COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT, HDMI OUT MAIN, HDMI OUT
SUB, or MONITOR OUT.
On some DVD players, you may need to change the digital or HDMI audio output
settings.

3
AV controller
MASTER VOLUME

Remote
controller

VOL

To adjust the volume, use the MASTER VOLUME control or the remote
controller’s [VOL] button.
Since the AV controller is designed for home theaters, it has a wide volume range for
precise adjustment. The volume can be set to –∞ dB, –81.5 dB, –81.0 dB through
+18.0 dB.

Select a listening mode and enjoy!
See “Using the Listening Modes” on page 79.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 58 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Listening to the Radio
■ Manual Tuning Mode

Listening to AM/FM Stations

TUNING MODE
TUNING

TUNING
MODE

Press the [TUNING MODE] button
so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the display.

MASTER VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

STANDBY
ZONE 2
ZONE 3

PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 1

AUX 2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

ZONE 2
PHONES

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

STEREO

TUNING

THX

POWER

RT/PTY/TP MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

RETURN

TUNING

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

SETUP
PRESET

CLEAR

OFF

ZONE 3

DIGITAL INPUT

LISTENING MODE
TUNING

ENTER

VIDEO

S VIDEO

L AUDIO R

DIGITAL

TUNING

Press and hold the TUNING Up or
Down [ ]/[ ] button.
The frequency stops changing when
you release the button.
Press the button repeatedly to change
the frequency one step at a time.

TUNER

With the built-in tuner, you can enjoy AM and FM radio
stations and store your favorite stations as presets for
easy selection.

TUNER

Use the [TUNER] input selector
button to select AM or FM.
In this example, FM has been selected.
Band

Frequency

(Actual display depends on country.)

Tuning into AM/FM Radio Stations
■ Auto Tuning Mode

TUNING
MODE

2
TUNING

Press the [TUNING MODE] button
so that the AUTO indicator
appears on the display.

Press the TUNING Up or Down
[ ]/[ ] button.
Searching stops when a station is
found.

TUNING

When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator
appears. When tuned into a stereo FM station, the FM
STEREO indicator also appears.
TUNED
AUTO

FM STEREO

The FM frequency changes in 0.2 MHz steps, 10 kHz
steps for AM.
In Manual Tuning mode, FM stations will be in mono.
Tuning into Weak FM Stereo Stations
If the signal from a stereo FM station is weak, it may be
impossible to get good reception. In this case, switch to
Manual Tuning mode and listen to the station in mono.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 59 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Listening to the Radio—Continued
■ Tuning into Stations by Frequency
You can tune into AM and FM stations directly by entering the appropriate frequency.

Displaying AM/FM Radio Information
DISPLAY
MASTER VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

STANDBY

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

INPUT

Number
buttons

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

PURE AUDIO

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

CLEAR

PHONO

D. TUN

+10

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

AUDIO SEL

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 1

AUX 2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

DISPLAY

TV VOL

D.TUN

Press the [DISPLAY] button to
display the available information.

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
VCR

VCR/DVR

PUSH TO OPEN

MACRO

DVD

ZONE2

CDR/MD
TV

CABLE

DOCK

SAT

RECEIVER

U
MEN

MEN
U

Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [D.TUN] button.
The [RECEIVER] button flashes.

RECEIVER

DISPLAY

SLEEP
P
TO

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

Band

Frequency

Preset #

Listening mode

D. TUN

CLEAR

(Actual display depends on country.)

2
DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TAPE

TUNER

Note:
• When you select a preset with a custom name (see
page 102), its name is displayed instead of the band
and frequency.

Within 8 seconds, use the number buttons to enter the frequency of the radio station.
For example, to tune to 87.5 (FM),
press 8, 7, 5.

PHONO

+10

Note:
While the [RECEIVER] button is flashing, you cannot select another input
source with the remote controller.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 60 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Listening to the Radio—Continued
Listening to HD Radio™ Stations
HD Radio technology brings digital radio to conventional analog AM and FM radio stations, with improved
sound quality, better reception, and new data services.
HD Radio technology provides CD-quality sound for
FM stations and FM-quality sound for AM stations. In
addition, FM HD Radio stations can transmit multiple
programs on the same frequency by using multicast
channels. Text data display incudes station name, song
title, artist name, and so on.
For more information about HD Radio technology, visit:
www.ibiquity.com
www.hdradio.com

TAPE

TUNER

CLEAR

PHONO

TV VOL

D. TUN

+10

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

MACRO

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

CABLE

ZONE2

CD
CDR/MD

RECEIVER

DOCK

SAT

TAPE/AMP
SLEEP

DIMMER

ENTER

MEN
U

ENU
PM

+
CH

PREV
CH

DISPLAY

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

ID E

E XI

RN
RE T U

TUP

DISPLAY

MUTING

REC

About HD Radio Stations

RANDOM

PLAYLIST

LISTENING MODE

HD Radio stations broadcast on the same AM and FM
frequencies they’ve always used, and you can receive
them by tuning into your favorite station as normal (see
page 58). You can store them as presets just like AM and
FM stations (see page 75).
If the current AM or FM station supports HD Radio technology, the HD indicator lights up.
While a digital HD Radio transmission is being received,
the DIGITAL indicator lights up. While an analog HD
Radio transmission is being received, the ANALOG
indicator lights up.

STEREO

SURR

REPEAT

AUDIO

PURE A

DIRECT

THX

ALL ST

TEST TONE

CH SEL

LEVEL-

LEVEL+

AUDIO SEL

L NIGHT

Re-EQ

VCR

DVD

HDD

SUBTITLE PLAY MODE

OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF

AUDIO SEL

RC-690M

AUDIO SEL
MASTER VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

STANDBY
ZONE 2
ZONE 3

Station name

HD indicator

PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 1

AUX 2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

ZONE 2
PHONES

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

STEREO

TUNING

THX

POWER

RT/PTY/TP MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

RETURN

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

SETUP
PRESET

CLEAR

OFF

ZONE 3

DIGITAL INPUT

LISTENING MODE
TUNING

Song title

Artist name

HD Radio channel number

• If the current AM or FM station supports HD Radio
technology, the station’s name will be displayed
instead of the band and frequency.
• When music data is received, song title and artist name
information is displayed.
• If the current HD Radio station supports multicast
channels, the name of the currently selected multicast
channel will be displayed.

ENTER

S VIDEO

VIDEO

L AUDIO R

DIGITAL

DISPLAY

PR-SC885_En.book Page 61 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Listening to the Radio—Continued
Selecting Multicast Channels

Displaying HD Radio Information

FM HD Radio stations can transmit multiple programs
on the same frequency by using what are called multicast
channels. If the current HD Radio station is broadcasting
multicast channels, the SPS (secondary program services) indicator lights up.

Press the [DISPLAY] button repeatedly to cycle through
the available information.

1
ENTER

2
ENTER

ENTER

Press [ENTER].
The SPS indicator flashes.

Use the Up and Down Arrow
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select a multicast channel, and then press
[ENTER] within 5 seconds.
If you select a multicast channel that is
not currently broadcasting, a plus [+]
symbol will appear, indicating that the
channel has been reserved. When
broadcasting commences, that channel
will be selected automatically.

Frequency

Station information

Artist information

Song title information

Reserved channel indication
HD Radio channel number

Note:
• Multicast channels are not available
on AM.

Selecting the Audio Format (Blend Mode)
HD Radio stations transmit both analog and digital versions of their programs and you can choose which one
you want to listen to.
Remote
controller

Use the [AUDIO SEL] button to
select Auto or Analog.

AUDIO SEL

AV controller

AUDIO SEL

Auto: Select to use the digital signal.
Analog: Select to use the analog signal.

Note:
• Multicast channels 2 through 8 only carry a digital signal, so to select an audio format, you must select multicast channel #1 first.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 62 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Listening to the Radio—Continued
Listening to XM Satellite Radio®
Important XM Radio Information
XM Satellite Radio offers an extraordinary variety of
commercial-free music, plus the best in sports, news,
talk and entertainment. XM is broadcast in superior
digital audio from coast to coast. From rock to reggae, from classical to hip hop, XM has something for
every music fan. XM’s dedication to playing the richest selection of music is matched by its passion for
live sporting events, talk radio, up-to-the-minute
news, stand-up comedy, children’s programming, and
much more. For U.S. customers, information about
XM Satellite Radio is available online at www.xmradio.com. For Canadian customers, information about
XM Canada is online at
www.xmradio.ca.
Note:
Hardware and required monthly subscription sold separately. Other fees and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only.
All fees and programming subject to change. Channels
with frequent explicit language are indicated with an XL.
Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by
calling 1-800-XMRADIO (US residents) and
1-877-GET-XMSR (Canadian residents).
For a full listing of the XM commercial-free channels
and advertising-supported channels, visit
lineup.xmradio.com (US residents) or xmradio.ca
(Canadian residents).
Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available
at xmradio.com (US residents) and xmradio.ca (Canadian residents). Only available in the 48 contiguous
United States and Canada. ©2007 XM Satellite Radio
Inc. All rights reserved. All other trademarks are the
property of their respective owners.

Connecting the XM Mini-Tuner and Home
Dock
To receive XM Satellite Radio, you need an XM MiniTuner and Home Dock, which includes a home antenna.
These are sold separately. For connection information,
refer to the instruction manual supplied with the XM
Mini-Tuner and Home Dock.
XM Mini-Tuner jack
XM

XM
SIRIUS

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

CABLE

ZONE2

CD
CDR/MD

RECEIVER

DOCK

SAT

TAPE/AMP

DIMMER
P
TO

U
MEN

MEN
U

ENTER

PREV
CH

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

SETUP

ID E

TUP

E XI

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

REC

RECEIVER

SLEEP

MUTING

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

Setting the Satellite Radio Mode
Before you can listen to XM Satellite Radio, you must
set the Satellite Radio mode to XM.

1
RECEIVER

A warning against reverse engineering:
It is prohibited to, and you agree that you will not, copy,
decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate, or otherwise access and/or make available any
technology incorporated in receivers compatible with
the XM Satellite Radio system. Furthermore, the
AMBE® voice compression software included in this
product is protected by intellectual property rights
including patent rights, copyrights, and trade secrets of
Digital Voice Systems, Inc. The software is licensed
solely for use within this product. The user of this or any
other software contained in an XM Radio is explicitly
prohibited from attempting to copy, decompile, reverse
engineer, hack, manipulate or disassemble the object
code, or in any other way convert the object code into
human-readable form.

MACRO

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

TUP

2
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Hardware Setup menu appears.
7.Hardware Setup

ENTER

1.Remote Control
2.Zone2/Zone3
3.Tuner
4.Analog Multich
5.HDMI

PR-SC885_En.book Page 63 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Listening to the Radio—Continued

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “3. Tuner,” and
then press [ENTER].
The Tuner screen appears.

ENTER

STANDBY

DVD

VCR/DVR

TV
INPUT

Number
buttons

7-3.Tuner
Satellite Radio

None

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

ENTER

PHONO

TUNER

CBL/SAT

D. TUN

+10

TV VOL

CLEAR

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

D.TUN

MACRO

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

CABLE

ZONE2

CDR/MD

Use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “XM.”
If there are 2 items on the Tuner
screen, use Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Satellite
Radio.”
Pressing the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons cycles through the following
options: None → XM → SIRIUS →
XM/SIRIUS
None: Select if you’re not using
satellite radio.
XM: Select to use XM Satellite
Radio.
SIRIUS: Select to use SIRIUS Satellite Radio.
XM/SIRIUS:Select to use XM Satellite Radio and SIRIUS Satellite Radio.

ENTER

5
SE

SAT

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

DIMMER
P
TO

U
MEN

MEN
U

ENTER

DISPLAY

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

PREV
CH

RECEIVER

SLEEP

ID E

TUP

E XI

RN
RE T U
MUTING

Selecting XM Satellite Radio
AV controller

On the AV controller, press the
[TUNER] input selector button
repeatedly to select XM.

TUNER

Remote
controller

RECEIVER

When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
Setup closes.

TUP

DOCK

TUNER

On the remote controller, press
the [RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE
button, and then press the
[TUNER] INPUT SELECTOR button repeatedly to select XM.
If “CHECK XM TUNER” appears on
the display, make sure the XM MiniTuner is connected properly.

Signing Up for XM Satellite Radio
TUNING

TUNER

MASTER VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

STANDBY
ZONE 2
ZONE 3

PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 1

AUX 2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

ZONE 2
PHONES

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

STEREO

TUNING

THX

POWER

RT/PTY/TP MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

RETURN

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

SETUP
PRESET

CLEAR

OFF

ZONE 3

DIGITAL INPUT

LISTENING MODE
TUNING

ENTER

SETUP
ENTER

S VIDEO

VIDEO

L AUDIO R

DIGITAL

Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner and Home
Dock, you are ready to subscribe to XM Satellite Radio.
You’ll need a major credit card and your XM Radio ID.
There are three places you can find your 8-character XM
Radio ID:
1. On the XM Mini-Tuner
2. On the XM Mini-Tuner packaging
3. On XM Channel 0, as explained below

1
TUNING

Use the Tuning Up and Down
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select RADIO
ID.
Your XM Radio ID number is displayed. Write it below for reference.

TUNING

PR-SC885_En.book Page 64 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Listening to the Radio—Continued

To sign up, go to:
http://activate.xmradio.com
Or call: 1-800-967-2346
For XM Canada, go to:
http://xmradio.ca
Or call: 1-877-438-9677

■ Category Search Mode

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, and then press the
[ENTER] button repeatedly to
select Category Search mode.

RECEIVER

ENTER

Notes:
• RADIO ID cannot be selected in Category Search
mode. You must select Channel Search mode (see
right column).
• The following letters are not used in XM Satellite
Radio IDs: I, O, S, F.
• XM Satellite Radio will transmit a special signal to
your AV controller to activate the full channel lineup.
Activation normally takes between 10 and 15 minutes,
but during busy peak periods, you may need to leave
the AV controller turned on for up to an hour.

Selecting XM Radio Channels
There are three ways to select XM radio channels:
1. Channel Search mode: select any channel.
2. Category Search mode: select channels by category.
3. Direct tuning: enter channel number.

Use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a category, and
use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a channel in
that category.

ENTER

■ Direct Tuning
You can select an XM radio channel directly by entering
its number.

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[D.TUN] button.
The [RECEIVER] button flashes.

RECEIVER

Note:
You can’t select Channel Search mode or Category
Search mode while the Tuning Arrow
indicators
are flashing, as tuning is in progress.

D. TUN

CLEAR

■ Channel Search Mode

1
RECEIVER

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, and then press the
[ENTER] button repeatedly to
select Channel Search mode.

2
DVD

VCR/DVR

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TAPE

TUNER

9
D. TUN

ENTER

CLEAR
11

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a channel.
Channel number
ENTER

Channel name

You can also use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select a category.

CBL/SAT

Within 8 seconds, use the number buttons to enter the channel
number.
For example, to select channel #20,
press 0, 2, 0, or 2, 0, [ENTER].

Note:
While the [RECEIVER] button is flashing, you cannot select another input
source with the remote controller.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 65 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Listening to the Radio—Continued
Displaying XM Radio Information

MEMORY
TUNING MODE
RETURN

AV controller

MASTER VOLUME

Press the [DISPLAY] button
repeatedly to cycle through the
available information.

DISPLAY

STANDBY/ON

STANDBY

Remote
controller

ZONE 2
ZONE 3

PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

DVD

CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

GAME/TV

AUX 1

TAPE

AUX 2

TUNER

PHONO

DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

ZONE 2
PHONES

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

STEREO

TUNING

THX

POWER

TUNING
MODE

RT/PTY/TP MEMORY

RETURN

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

SETUP
PRESET

CLEAR

OFF

ZONE 3

DIGITAL INPUT

LISTENING MODE
TUNING

S VIDEO

ENTER

VIDEO

DIGITAL

DISPLAY

ENTER
TUNING

L AUDIO R

VCR

↓

ZONE3

Channel number & preset number
ZONE2

CDR/MD
TV

CABLE

DOCK

SAT

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

DIMMER
U
MEN

MEN
U

ENTER

PREV
CH

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

DISPLAY

ID E

TUP

E XI

RETURN

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

REC

RECEIVER

MUTING

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

Selecting Channels on the AV controller:

TUNING
MODE

↓

Category → Artist → Song title → Listening mode

SLEEP
P
TO

CH + / –

The following information can be displayed:
Channel name

REMOTE MODE
DVD

DISPLAY

Press the [TUNING MODE] button
repeatedly to select Channel
Search mode or Category Search
mode.

Notes:
• If the category, artist, or song title is not available,
“- - -” will be displayed instead.
• The listening mode is not displayed when Zone 2 or
Zone 3 is selected.

Positioning the XM Mini-Tuner System
You can check the signal strength of the XM radio signal
and adjust the position of the XM Mini-Tuner system
accordingly.

1
RECEIVER

Press [ENTER] repeatedly to
select a category.
SE

ENTER

3
TUNING

TUNING

Use the Tuning Up and Down [ ]/
[ ] buttons to select a channel.
In Channel Search mode, you can
select any channel.
In Category Search mode, you can only
select channels from the currently
selected category.

TUP

2
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

Remote
controller
RN
RE T U

To listen to the previously
selected XM channel, press the
[RETURN] button.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “4. Source
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Source Setup menu appears.
4.Source Setup

Selecting the Previous Channel:
AV controller

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

DVD
1.IntelliVolume
2.A/V Sync
3.Name Edit
4.Satellite Radio
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock

Note:
• If the Satellite Radio mode is set to
None (see page 63), the “4. Satellite
Radio” item is not available.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 66 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Listening to the Radio—Continued

3
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “4. Satellite
Radio,” and then press [ENTER].
The Satellite Radio screen appears.
The name of the currently selected
input selector is displayed in a box.

ENTER

Position the XM Mini-Tuner
Antenna so that as many bars as
possible (up to 3) appear on the
XM Satellite signal strength
meter.
The best signal is achieved when the
antenna is pointing to the southern sky
through an unobstructed window.
4-4.SAT Radio
XM Antenna Aiming

Satellite

Terrestrial

If you cannot receive a satellite signal,
position the XM Mini-Tuner System so
that as many bars as possible (up to 3)
appear on the XM Terrestrial signal
strength meter.
Notes:
• So long as the signal strength is good, you can enjoy
XM Radio by using either satellite or terrestrial reception.
• Terrestrial signals are only available in certain areas.
• The XM information is only displayed when the Satellite Radio mode is set to XM or XM/SIRIUS (see
page 63).
• If you’re using both XM Satellite Radio and SIRIUS
Satellite Radio and the Satellite mode is set to
XM/SIRIUS (see page 63), signal strength meters for
both systems appear on the same screen.

XM Radio Messages
The following messages may appear while using XM
Satellite radio.
❑ CHECK ANTENNA
The XM antenna is not properly connected to the
Mini-Tuner Dock. Check the connection. Check the
antenna cable for damage.

❑ UPDATING
XM is updating your Mini-Tuner with the latest
encryption code. Wait a few seconds until the update
is done. Alternatively, you may be attempting to tune
to a channel that is blocked or that you cannot
receive with your subscription package. To receive
that channel, contact XM Satellite Radio.
❑ NO SIGNAL
The XM Mini-Tuner cannot receive the satellite signal. Check the XM antenna for obstructions to the
southern sky. Check the antenna positioning with the
Antenna Aiming function (see left column).
❑ LOADING
The AV controller is tuning or decoding audio or text
data. Please wait. If this occurs often, check the XM
antenna position with the Antenna Aiming function
(see left column).
❑ OFF AIR
The XM channel you selected is not currently broadcasting. Select another channel.
❑ UPGRADE XM TUNER
The connected XM CNP-1000 is incompatible. The
AV controller features advanced technology that is
designed for use with the XM Mini-Tuner. Contact
XM Listener Care and ask about upgrading your XM
CNP-1000 to an XM Mini-Tuner. Have the AV controller’s model name and CNP-1000 XM ID number
ready beforehand, and explain that your AV controller is displaying the message “Upgrade XM Tuner.”
If you already have an XM Mini-Tuner connected
and you see this message, turn off the AV controller,
make sure the XM Mini-Tuner is properly seated in
the Mini-Tuner Dock, and then turn the AV controller back on again. If the message reappears, contact
XM Listener Care and explain the issue that you’re
experiencing and the corrective actions you’ve tried.
❑ CHECK XM TUNER
The AV controller is having difficulty communicating with the XM Mini-Tuner module. Make sure the
XM Mini-Tuner is properly seated in the Mini-Tuner
Dock. And make sure the Mini-Tuner Dock cable is
properly connected to the AV controller and is not
damaged. If the issue persists, contact XM Listener
Care. Have the AV controller’s model name ready
beforehand, and explain the issue that you’re experiencing and the corrective actions you’ve tried.
❑ Unavailable Channel
You may be attempting to select a channel that is
unavailable or has changed to a different channel
number. Check xmradio.com for the latest channel
listing.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 67 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Listening to the Radio—Continued
Listening to SIRIUS Satellite Radio®
Important SIRIUS Satellite Radio Information
SIRIUS is available in the US for subscribers with
addresses in the continental US and is available in
Canada for subscribers with a Canadian address. To
Get SIRIUS Satellite Radio a subscription and
compatible tuner and antenna are required and sold
separately. Visit sirius.com for the most complete
and up-to-date channel lineup and information.
“SIRIUS” and the SIRIUS dog logo and related
marks are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.

Indoor/outdoor antenna
with 21-foot cable
SiriusConnect
receiver
8-pin mini DIN
connector cable
SIRIUS

SIRIUS
jack

XM
SIRIUS

Note:
Hardware and required basic monthly subscription sold
separately. Installation costs and other fees and taxes,
including a one-time activation fee may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming
subject to change.
What is SIRIUS Satellite Radio?
Simply The Best Radio on RadioTM with all your favorite entertainment including 100% commercial-free
music, plus superior sports coverage, uncensored talk
and comedy, world-class entertainment, news, weather
and more for your car, home or office. For more information visit sirius.com or siriuscanada.ca
A warning against reverse engineering:
It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse
engineer, or manipulate any technology incorporated in
receivers compatible with the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
system.
“SIRIUS” and the SIRIUS dog
logo are registered trademarks of
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.

AC power

AV controller

To use the included antenna indoors, you must place it at
a north-, west-, or east-facing window, depending on
where you live. If this isn’t possible, you’ll need to
install it outside, away from any overhead obstructions.

Positioning the Antenna
For a consistent satellite signal, the antenna must be
positioned correctly. Use the following map to determine
which area you are in and position the antenna accordingly.
SKY
NORTH

WEST

EAST

HORIZON
SOUTH

Setting Up the SiriusConnect™ Home
Tuner
The optional SiriusConnect Home tuner kit includes
everything for easy home installation, including the SiriusConnect receiver, indoor/outdoor antenna with 21foot cable, 8-pin mini DIN connector cable, and an AC
power adapter. See the SiriusConnect Home tuner’s
instructions for more information.
Use the 8-pin mini DIN connector cable to connect the
SiriusConnect receiver to the SIRIUS jack on the rear of
the AV controller.

Area 1: Point the antenna toward the sky in the east,
northeast, or southeast, either through a window or outside.
Area 2: Point the antenna toward the sky in the north or
northeast, either through a window or outside.
Area 3: Point the antenna toward the sky in the north or
northwest, either through a window or outside.
Area 4: Point the antenna toward the sky in the west,
northwest, or southwest, either through a window or
outside.
Area 5: Put the antenna outside and point it straight up.
The antenna cannot be used indoors.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 68 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Listening to the Radio—Continued
TUNING

TUNER

MASTER VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

ENTER
STANDBY
ZONE 2

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “3. Tuner,” and
then press [ENTER].
The Tuner screen appears.

ZONE 3

PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

DVD

CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

GAME/TV

AUX 1

TAPE

AUX 2

TUNER

PHONO

7-3.Tuner

DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

ZONE 2
PHONES

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

STEREO

TUNING

THX

POWER

RT/PTY/TP MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

RETURN

Satellite Radio

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

SETUP

None

PRESET

CLEAR

OFF

ZONE 3

DIGITAL INPUT

LISTENING MODE

S VIDEO

ENTER

TUNING

VIDEO

L AUDIO R

DIGITAL

ENTER

SETUP
ENTER

4
ON

STANDBY

DVD

VCR/DVR

ENTER

INPUT

TUNER

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

TV VOL

D. TUN

+10

CLEAR

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

MACRO

ZONE3

ENTER

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

CABLE

ZONE2

CD
CDR/MD

RECEIVER

DOCK

SAT

TAPE/AMP

DIMMER
P
TO

U
MEN

MEN
U

ENTER

PREV
CH

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

SETUP

ID E

TUP

E XI

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

REC

RECEIVER

SLEEP

MUTING

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

Setting the Satellite Radio Mode
Before you can listen to SIRIUS Satellite Radio, you
must set the Satellite Radio mode to SIRIUS.

1
RECEIVER

Use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “SIRIUS.”
If there are 2 items on the Tuner
screen, use Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Satellite
Radio.”
Pressing the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons cycles through the following
options: None → XM → SIRIUS →
XM/SIRIUS
None: Select if you’re not using
satellite radio.
XM: Select to use XM Satellite
Radio.
SIRIUS: Select to use SIRIUS Satellite Radio.
XM/SIRIUS:Select to use XM Satellite Radio and SIRIUS Satellite Radio.

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

5
SE

TUP

Selecting SIRIUS Satellite Radio
AV controller

TUP

When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
Setup closes.

On the AV controller, press the
[TUNER] input selector button
repeatedly to select SIRIUS.

TUNER

2
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Hardware Setup menu appears.

Remote
controller

RECEIVER

On the remote controller, press
the [RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE
button, and then press the
[TUNER] INPUT SELECTOR button repeatedly to select SIRIUS.

7.Hardware Setup

ENTER

1.Remote Control
2.Zone2/Zone3
3.Tuner
4.Analog Multich
5.HDMI

TUNER

If “CHECK SR TUNER” appears on
the display, make sure the SiriusConnect receiver is connected properly. If
“ANTENNA ERROR” appears, make
sure the antenna is connected properly.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 69 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Listening to the Radio—Continued
Signing Up for SIRIUS Satellite Radio
Before you can use SIRIUS Satellite Radio, you must
first sign up for an account. You’ll need a major credit
card and your SIRIUS Satellite Radio ID, which you can
get from the AV controller, as explained below, or from
the SiriusConnect Home tuner package.

■ Channel Search Mode

RECEIVER

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, and then press the
[ENTER] button repeatedly to
select Channel Search mode.

ENTER

1
TUNING

Use the TUNING Up and Down
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select
channel 0.
Your SIRIUS Satellite Radio ID number is displayed. Write it below.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a channel.
Channel number

TUNING

ENTER

To sign up, go to:
http://activate.siriusradio.com
Or call: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (7474)

Note:
• Your ID is also displayed on the Satellite Radio
screen. See “Positioning the SiriusConnect Home
Antenna” on page 73.

Channel name

You can also use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select a category.

■ Category Search Mode

1
Selecting SIRIUS Satellite Radio Channels
There are three ways to select SIRIUS Satellite Radio
channels:
1. Channel Search mode: select any channel.
2. Category Search mode: select channels by category.
3. Direct tuning: enter channel number.

RECEIVER

ENTER

2
ENTER

STANDBY

TV
INPUT

Number
buttons

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

Use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a category, and
use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a channel in
that category.

PHONO

D. TUN

+10

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, and then press the
[ENTER] button repeatedly to
select Category Search mode.

TV VOL

CLEAR

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

D.TUN

MACRO

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

ZONE2

CDR/MD
TV

CABLE

DOCK

SAT

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP

DIMMER
P
TO

U
MEN

MEN
U

ENTER

PREV
CH

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

RECEIVER

■ Direct Tuning
You can select a SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel directly
by entering its number.

ID E

TUP

E XI

RECEIVER

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[D.TUN] button.
The [RECEIVER] button flashes.

MUTING

D. TUN

CLEAR
REC

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

PR-SC885_En.book Page 70 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Listening to the Radio—Continued

2
DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TAPE

TUNER

Within 8 seconds, use the number buttons to enter the channel
number.
For example, to select channel #20,
press 0, 2, 0, or 2, 0, [ENTER].

CLEAR
11

With SIRIUS Parental Lock, you can lock out channels
that you do not want to receive and use a 4-digit PIN
number to prevent others from unlocking them.

9
D. TUN

Parental Lock

Note:
While the [RECEIVER] button is flashing, you cannot select another input
source with the remote controller.

Notes:
• If you select an unavailable channel, “INVALID
CHANNEL” appears on the display.
• If you select a channel that you are not subscribed to,
“CALL SIRIUS” appears on the display.
• Channels that are locked must be unlocked before you
can listen to them. See “Parental Lock” on right column for more information.

RECEIVER

TUNING
MODE

TUP

2
ENTER

ENTER

Press the [TUNING MODE] button
repeatedly to select Channel
Search mode or Category Search
mode.

3
TUNING

TUNING

3
Use the Tuning Up and Down
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select a channel.
In Channel Search mode, you can
select any channel.
In Category Search mode, you can only
select channels from the currently
selected category.

DVD
1.IntelliVolume
2.A/V Sync
3.Name Edit
4.Satellite Radio
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock

Note:
If the Satellite Radio mode is set to
None or XM (see page 68), the “5. SIRIUS Parental Lock” item is not available.

Press [ENTER] repeatedly to
select a category.
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “4. Source
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Source Setup menu appears.
4.Source Setup

Selecting Channels on the AV controller:

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “5. SIRIUS
Parental Lock,” and then press
[ENTER].
The SIRIUS Parental Lock screen
appears.
4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock

Enter Code

Selecting the Previous Channel:
AV controller
RETURN

Remote
controller
RN
RE T U

To listen to the previously
selected SIRIUS Satellite Radio
channel, press the [RETURN]
button.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 71 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Listening to the Radio—Continued

Press the [D.TUN] button, and
then use the number buttons to
enter the 4-digit PIN number.

D. TUN

7
ENTER

CLEAR

Or
or
DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

AUX1

AUX2

GAME/TV

TAPE

TUNER

9
D. TUN

CLEAR
11

Use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a number on the
screen, and then press [ENTER].
Repeat this for each of the four
digits in the PIN number.
If you’re entering the PIN number for
the very first time, the PIN is stored,
and the following screen appears.

RN
RE T U

When you’ve finished, press
[ENTER] to save your changes,
or press [RETURN] to return to
the previous screen without saving.
When [ENTER] is pressed, the confirmation message “Locked” or
“Unlocked” appears.

Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
SE

TUP

4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock

Edit Code
Parental Lock

Notes:
• While a channel is locked, it cannot be selected for
listening.
• To unlock a channel, you must enter the correct PIN
number and change it to Unlocked in step 6.

ENTER

5
ENTER

If you’ve already set a PIN number, you
must enter the correct PIN to get to this
screen. If you enter the wrong PIN, the
message “Wrong Code!” appears and
you’ll have to enter the PIN again.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Parental Lock,”
and then press [ENTER].
The Parental Lock screen appears.

STANDBY

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

D. TUN

+10

4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock

TV VOL

CLEAR

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

D.TUN

MACRO

Parental Lock
Channel

PHONO

ENTER

TV
INPUT

Number
buttons

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE

Status

DVD

VCR

CABLE

ZONE2

CDR/MD

0ch

wwwwwwwww

Locked

DOCK

SAT

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

:CHANNEL
:STATUS

ENT :SAVE
RET :RETURN

P
TO

MEN
U

ENTER

6
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a channel, and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select Locked or
Unlocked.
The number, name, and status of the
currently selected channel is displayed.

PREV
CH

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

RECEIVER

SLEEP
U
MEN

ID E

TUP

E XI

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

MUTING

Changing the PIN Number

1
RECEIVER

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

TUP

PR-SC885_En.book Page 72 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Listening to the Radio—Continued

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “4. Source
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Source Setup menu appears.

ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Edit Code,”
and then press [ENTER].
The New Code screen appears.

ENTER

4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock

4.Source Setup
DVD
1.IntelliVolume
2.A/V Sync
3.Name Edit
4.Satellite Radio
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock

ENTER

Note:
If the Satellite Radio mode is set to
None or XM (see page 68), the “5. SIRIUS Parental Lock” item is not available.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “5. SIRIUS
Parental Lock,” and then press
[ENTER].
The SIRIUS Parental Lock screen
appears.

ENTER

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TAPE

TUNER

9
D. TUN

CLEAR
11

VCR/DVR

AUX1

AUX2

TAPE

TUNER

CLEAR

D. TUN
11

Use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a number on the
screen, and then press [ENTER].
Repeat this for each of the four
digits in the old PIN number.
If you enter the correct PIN number, the
following screen appears.
4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
Edit Code
Parental Lock

ENTER

Comfirm

If you enter the wrong PIN number, the
message “Wrong Code!” appears and
you’ll have to enter the PIN again.

Confirm the new PIN number by
entering it again.
If you confirm the PIN number correctly, the new PIN is saved and the
message “Complete” appears.
If you confirm the PIN number incorrectly, “Wrong Code!” appears, and
you’ll be returned to step 5 to try again.

Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock

Or
DVD

Press the [D.TUN] button, and
then use the number buttons to
enter the old 4-digit PIN number.

D. TUN

CLEAR

Use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a number on the
screen, and then press [ENTER].
Repeat this for each of the four
digits in the new PIN number.
The Confirm screen appears.

ENTER

Enter Code

Press the [D.TUN] button, and
then use the number buttons to
enter the new 4-digit PIN number.

D. TUN

CLEAR

4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock

ENTER

New Code

ENTER

TUP

PR-SC885_En.book Page 73 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Listening to the Radio—Continued
TUNING

TUNER

MASTER VOLUME

You can check the strength of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
signal and adjust the position of the SiriusConnect Home
antenna accordingly.

STANDBY/ON

STANDBY
ZONE 2
ZONE 3

ON
PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

DVD

STANDBY

GAME/TV

AUX 1

TAPE

AUX 2

TUNER

PHONO

DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

INPUT
ZONE 2
PHONES

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

POWER

STEREO

TUNING

THX

DVD

TUNING
MODE

VCR/DVR

RT/PTY/TP MEMORY

SETUP

RETURN

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

CBL/SAT
PRESET

DIGITAL INPUT

ZONE 3

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

LISTENING MODE

GAME/TV

OFF

CLEAR

ENTER

TUNING

PHONO

+10

Positioning the SiriusConnect Home
Antenna

S VIDEO

VIDEO

L AUDIO R

DIGITAL

1
RECEIVER

SETUP
0
ENTER
D. TUN

TV VOL

CLEAR

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

MACRO

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[TUNER] button, and [SETUP]
button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

TUP

ZONE2

CDR/MD
TV

CABLE

DOCK

SAT

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

DIMMER
P
TO

U
MEN

MEN
U

ENTER

PREV
CH

DISPLAY

ID E

TUP

E XI

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

RECEIVER

SLEEP

ENTER

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “4. Source
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Source Setup menu appears.

MUTING

4.Source Setup
REC

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

ENTER
LISTENING MODE
STEREO

SURR

DVD
1.IntelliVolume
2.A/V Sync
3.Name Edit
4.Satellite Radio
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock

Displaying SIRIUS Satellite Radio
Information
AV controller

Note:
If the Satellite Radio mode is set to
None (see page 68), the “4. Satellite
Radio” item is not available.

Press the [DISPLAY] button
repeatedly to cycle through the
available information.

DISPLAY

Remote
controller

3
ENTER

DISPLAY

The following information can be displayed:

ENTER

Channel name

↓
Channel number & preset number

↓
Category

↓
Artist/composer

↓
Song title

↓
Listening mode

Note:
• If the category, artist/composer, or song title is not
available, “- - -” will be displayed instead.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 74 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Listening to the Radio—Continued

Position the SiriusConnect Home
antenna so that as many bars as
possible (up to 3) appear on the
SIRIUS Satellite signal strength
meter.
4-4.SAT Radio
SIRIUS Antenna Aiming

Satellite
SIRIUS ID

Terrestrial

000000000000

If you cannot receive a satellite signal,
position the SiriusConnect Home
antenna so that as many bars as possible
(up to 3) appear on the SIRIUS Terrestrial signal strength meter.
Notes:
• So long as the signal strength is good, you can enjoy
SIRIUS Satellite Radio by using either satellite or terrestrial reception.
• Terrestrial signals are only available in certain areas.
• The SIRIUS information on the Satellite Radio screen
is only displayed when the Satellite Radio mode is set
to SIRIUS or XM/SIRIUS (see page 68).
• If you’re using both XM Satellite Radio and SIRIUS
Satellite Radio and the Satellite mode is set to
XM/SIRIUS (see page 68), signal strength meters for
both systems appear on the same screen.

SIRIUS Satellite Radio Messages
The following messages may appear while using
SIRIUS Satellite Radio.
❑ ACQUIRING
The SiriusConnect receiver is acquiring the signal or
no signal is present. Make sure the SiriusConnect
Home tuner is connected properly and that there are
no obstacles close by.
❑ ANTENNA ERROR
Make sure the SiriusConnect Home tuner is connected properly.
❑ SUB UPDATED
Displayed while your subscription is being updated.
No operations can be performed until this message
has cleared.
❑ UPDATING XXX%
Displayed while the channel map is being updated.
Wait until the updating is complete.
❑ UPDATING
Displayed while the SiriusConnect receiver’s firmware is being updated.
❑ INVALID CHANNEL
Displayed if you select an unavailable channel.
❑ CALL SIRIUS
Displayed when you select a channel to which you
are not subscribed. Call SIRIUS if you want to subscribe.
❑ CHECK SR TUNER
Displayed if the SiriusConnect receiver is not connected. Make sure the SiriusConnect receiver is connected properly, and make sure its AC adapter is
plugged in.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 75 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Listening to the Radio—Continued
Presetting AM, FM, XM, and SIRIUS
Stations

Selecting Presets
PRESET
ON

STANDBY

DVD

VCR/DVR

TV
MASTER VOLUME

INPUT

2, 4

STANDBY/ON

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

STANDBY
ZONE 2
ZONE 3

MASTER VOLUME

PURE AUDIO

STANDBY/ON

AUDIO SEL

ZONE 2
PHONES

STANDBY

OFF

DVD

LEVEL

TONE

CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

HDMI OUT

STEREO

THX

GAME/TV

AUX 1

PHONO

POWER

DIGITAL INPUT

ZONE 3

LISTENING MODE

RETURN

TV VOL

PHONO

DISPLAY

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

SETUP

CLEAR

PRESET

CLEAR

OFF

PUSH TO OPEN

D. TUN

TUNING
MODE

+10
ON

TUNER

TUNING

RT/PTY/TP MEMORY

ZONE 2
ZONE 3

TAPE

AUX 2

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

S VIDEO

ENTER

TUNING

VIDEO

L AUDIO R

DIGITAL

MACRO
PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 1

AUX 2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

ZONE 2
PHONES

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

STEREO

TUNING

THX

POWER

RT/PTY/TP MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

RETURN

CLEAR

OFF

ZONE 3

DIGITAL INPUT

LISTENING MODE
TUNING

ENTER

S VIDEO

VIDEO

L AUDIO R

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

SETUP
PRESET

DVD

VCR

CABLE

ZONE2

DIGITAL

CDR/MD
RECEIVER

DOCK

SAT

TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

You can store a combination of up to 40 of your favorite
AM, FM, XM, and SIRIUS radio stations.

MEMORY

3
PRESET

MEMORY

MEN
U

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

PREV
CH

ID E

TUP

XI T

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

Press the [MEMORY] button.
The preset number flashes.

MUTING

To select a preset, use the PRESET [ ]/[ ] buttons or the
remote controller’s CH [+/–] button.

PRESET

While the preset number is flashing (about 8 seconds), use the
PRESET [ ]/[ ] buttons to
select a preset from 1 through 40.

Press the [MEMORY] button
again to store the station.
The station is stored and the preset
number stops flashing.
Repeat this procedure for all of your
favorite stations.

U
MEN

CH +/–

Tune into the AM, FM, XM, or SIRIUS station you want to store as a
preset.

SLEEP
P
TO

CH
DISC
ALBUM

Deleting Presets

2
MASTER VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

STANDBY

Note:
• You can name your radio presets for easy identification (see page 102).

ZONE 2
ZONE 3

PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 1

AUX 2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

ZONE 2
PHONES

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

STEREO

TUNING

THX

POWER

RT/PTY/TP MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

RETURN

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

SETUP
PRESET

CLEAR

OFF

ZONE 3

DIGITAL INPUT

LISTENING MODE
TUNING

ENTER

S VIDEO

VIDEO

L AUDIO R

DIGITAL

Select the preset that you want to
delete.
See the previous section.

2
MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

CLEAR

While holding down the [MEMORY] button, press the
[TUNING MODE] button.
The preset is deleted and its number
disappears from the display.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 76 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Common Functions
This section explains functions that can be used with any
input source.
AUX1

GAME/TV

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

CLEAR

PHONO

D. TUN

+10

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

You can adjust the volume of each speaker while listening to an input source. These temporary adjustments are
cancelled when the AV controller is set to Standby.

TV VOL

MACRO

Press
[RECEIVER]
first

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

CABLE

ZONE2

CD
CDR/MD

SAT

TAPE/AMP
SLEEP

PM
TO

SLEEP

MEN
U

ENU

LEVEL

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

PREV
CH

E XI

ID E

RN
RE T U

TUP

LEVEL

Use the remote controller’s
[CH SEL] button to select each
speaker, and use the [LEVEL–]
and [LEVEL+] buttons to adjust
the volume.
You can adjust the volume of each
speaker from –12 dB to +12 dB
(–15 dB to +12 dB for the subwoofer).

MUTING

DISPLAY

MUTING

REC

RANDOM

PLAYLIST

LISTENING MODE

CH SEL

RECEIVER

DOCK

DIMMER

DISPLAY

Adjusting Speaker Levels

STEREO

SURR

REPEAT

AUDIO

PURE A

DIRECT

THX

ALL ST

TEST TONE

CH SEL

LEVEL-

LEVEL+

AUDIO SEL

L NIGHT

Re-EQ

VCR

DVD

HDD

SUBTITLE PLAY MODE

LEVEL – +

OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF

RC-690M

MASTER VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

Notes:
• You cannot use this function while the AV controller
is muted.
• Speakers that are set to No or None in the Speaker
Configuration cannot be adjusted (see page 94).
■ Headphones
While a pair of headphones is connected, you can use the
[CH SEL], [LEVEL–], and [LEVEL+] buttons to adjust
the volume of each headphone speaker (left and right),
from –12 dB to +12 dB each.

STANDBY

ZONE 2
ZONE 3

PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 1

AUX 2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

ZONE 2

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

STEREO

TUNING

THX

PHONES

DIMMER

MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

RETURN

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

SETUP
PRESET

CLEAR
ZONE 3

DIGITAL INPUT

LISTENING MODE
TUNING

PHONES

DIMMER

ENTER

S VIDEO

VIDEO

L AUDIO R

DIGITAL

DISPLAY

Setting the Display Brightness

These settings are stored when the AV controller is set to
Standby.

Muting the AV Controller
You can temporarily mute the output of the AV controller.

You can adjust the brightness of the display.
Remote
controller
DIMMER

AV controller
DIMMER

Press the remote controller’s
[DIMMER] button repeatedly to
select:
• Normal + VOLUME light on.
• Normal + VOLUME light off.
• Dim + VOLUME light off.
• Dimmer + VOLUME light off.
You can also use the AV controller’s
[DIMMER] button.

MUTING

Press the remote controller’s
[MUTING] button.
The output is muted and the MUTING
indicator flashes on the display.

To unmute the AV controller, press the remote controller’s [MUTING] button again, or adjust the volume. The
output is unmuted and the MUTING indicator goes off.
Muting is cancelled when the AV controller is set to
Standby.
Tip:
You can specify how much the output is muted with the
Muting Level setting (see page 104).

PR-SC885_En.book Page 77 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Common Functions—Continued
Using the Sleep Timer

Displaying Source Information

With the sleep timer, you can set the AV controller so
that it turns off automatically after a specified period.
SLEEP

Press the remote controller’s
[SLEEP] button repeatedly to
select the required sleep time.
You can set the sleep time from 90 to 10
minutes in 10 minute steps.
The SLEEP indicator appears on the
display when the sleep timer has been
set, as shown. The specified sleep time
appears on the display for about 5 seconds, then the previous display reappears.
SLEEP indicator

You can display various information about the current
input source as follows.
Remote
controller

DISPLAY

Press the [DISPLAY] button
repeatedly to cycle through the
available information.

AV controller

DISPLAY

The following information can typically be displayed:
Input source
Listening
mode

To cancel the sleep timer, press the [SLEEP] button
repeatedly until the SLEEP indicator disappears.
To check the remaining sleep time, press the [SLEEP]
button. Note that if you press the [SLEEP] button while
the sleep time is being displayed, you’ll shorten the sleep
time by 10 minutes.

Using Headphones
For private listening, you can connect a pair of stereo
headphones (1/4-inch phone plug) to the AV controller’s
PHONES jack.

Signal format*
Sampling
frequency

* If the input signal is analog, no format information is
displayed. If the input signal is PCM, the sampling
frequency is displayed. If the input signal is digital but
not PCM, the signal format and the number of channels is displayed. For some digital input signals,
including multichannel PCM, the signal format, number of channels, and sampling frequency is displayed.
Information is displayed for about 3 seconds, then the
previous display reappears.

Notes:
• Always turn down the volume before connecting your
headphones.
• While the headphones plug is inserted in the PHONES
jack, the speakers are turned off and the Headphone
indicator lights up.
• When you connect a pair of headphones, the listening
mode is set to Stereo, unless it was already set to Pure
Audio, Mono, Stereo, or Direct, in which case it stays
the same.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 78 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Common Functions—Continued
Selecting Audio Inputs

Specifying the Digital Signal Format

1
REC

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

MASTER VOLUME

LISTENING MODE
STANDBY/ON

STEREO

SURR

REPEAT

AUDIO

PURE A

DIRECT

TEST TONE

CH SEL

SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
THX

ALL ST

LEVEL-

LEVEL+

L NIGHT

Re-EQ

STANDBY
ZONE 2
ZONE 3

PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 1

AUX 2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF

AUDIO SEL

ZONE 2

AUDIO SEL

PHONES

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

STEREO

TUNING

THX

POWER

RT/PTY/TP MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

RETURN

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

SETUP
PRESET

VCR

DVD

HDD

CLEAR

OFF

ZONE 3

DIGITAL INPUT

LISTENING MODE
TUNING

ENTER

S VIDEO

VIDEO

L AUDIO R

DIGITAL

RC-690M

If you connect a component to more than one audio
input, such as a DVD player connected to analog, digital,
multichannel, and HDMI inputs, you can use the
[AUDIO SEL] button to select which audio input you
want to use to listen to that component.

AUDIO SEL

Press the [AUDIO SEL] button
repeatedly to select an audio
input: HDMI > Auto > Multich >
Analog.
HDMI: Selects the assigned HDMI
IN, and the HDMI indicator
appears on the display. (The
HDMI IN must already be
assigned to the current input
selector. See page 47.)
Auto: Selects the assigned COAXIAL or OPTICAL DIGITAL
IN, and the DIGITAL indicator appears on the display.
(The DIGITAL IN must
already be assigned to the
current input selector. See
page 49.) If there is no digital
signal, the analog input is
used instead.
Multich: Selects the multichannel
input, and the ANALOG indicator appears on the display.
(The multichannel input must
already be assigned to the
current input selector. See
page 51.)
Analog: Selects the analog input, and
the ANALOG indicator
appears on the display.
You can also use the [AUDIO SEL]
button on the AV controller.

Normally, the AV controller detects the format of digital
input signals automatically. However, if you experience
either of the following issues when playing PCM or DTS
sources, you can specify the signal format manually.
• If the beginnings of tracks from a PCM source are cut
off, try the PCM setting.
• If noise is produced when fast forwarding or rewinding a DTS CD, try the DTS setting.

Press the [AUDIO SEL] button
repeatedly to select Auto.

AUDIO SEL

While “Auto” is shown on the display, use the Up [ ] and Down
[ ] buttons to select:
PCM: Only input signals in PCM
format are output, and the
PCM indicator lights up. The
indicator flashes if the input
signal is not PCM.
DTS: Only input signals in DTS
format are output, and the
DTS indicator lights up. The
indicator flashes if the input
signal is not DTS.
Auto (default): The format is detected
automatically. If no digital
input signal is present, the
analog input is used instead.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 79 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Using the Listening Modes
Selecting with the Remote Controller

Selecting the Listening Modes

P
TO

For a description of each listening mode, see “About the
Listening Modes” on page 84.

• The Dolby Digital and DTS listening modes
can only be selected if your DVD player is
connected to the AV controller with a digital
audio connection (coaxial, optical, or HDMI).

PREV
CH

Selecting on the AV Controller
STEREO

ID E

VOL

TUP

E XI

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

REC

• While a pair of headphones is connected,
you can only select the Pure Audio, Mono,
Direct, or Stereo listening mode.

MEN
U

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

• The listening modes you can select depends
on the format of the input signal. To check
the format, see “Displaying Source Information” on page 77.

U
MEN

MUTING

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

SURR
,

LISTENING MODE

STEREO
PURE A
DIRECT

STEREO

SURR

REPEAT

AUDIO

PURE A

DIRECT

THX

ALL ST

TEST TONE

CH SEL

LEVEL-

LEVEL+

AUDIO SEL

L NIGHT

Re-EQ

VCR

DVD

HDD

SUBTITLE PLAY MODE

OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF

ALL ST
THX

RC-690M

■ [STEREO] button
This button selects the Stereo listening mode.

THX
MASTER VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

STANDBY

■ [SURR] button
This button selects the Dolby Digital and DTS listening modes.

ZONE 2
ZONE 3

PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 1

AUX 2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

ZONE 2
PHONES

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

STEREO

TUNING

THX

POWER

RT/PTY/TP MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

RETURN

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

SETUP
PRESET

CLEAR

OFF

ZONE 3

DIGITAL INPUT

LISTENING MODE
TUNING

PURE AUDIO

ENTER

S VIDEO

VIDEO

L AUDIO R

DIGITAL

LISTENING MODE

■ [PURE AUDIO] button
This button selects the Pure Audio listening mode.
When this mode is selected, the AV controller’s display is turned off and only the HDMI outputs output
video signals. Pressing this button again will select
the previous listening mode.
■ [STEREO] button
This button selects the Stereo listening mode.
■ [THX] button
This button selects the THX listening modes.

■ LISTENING MODE [ ]/[ ] buttons
Pressing these buttons repeatedly cycles through all
of the listening modes that can be used with the current input source.
■ [PURE A] button
This button selects the Pure Audio listening mode.
When this mode is selected, the AV controller’s display is turned off and only the HDMI outputs output
video signals.
■ [DIRECT] button
This button selects the Direct listening mode.
■ [THX] button
This button selects the THX listening modes.
■ [ALL ST] button
This button selects the All Channel Stereo listening
mode.

■ LISTENING MODE [ ]/[ ] buttons
Pressing these buttons repeatedly cycles through all
of the listening modes that can be used with the current input source.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 80 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Using the Listening Modes—Continued
Listening Modes Available for Each Source Format
Analog and PCM Sources
PCM
Source format

32–96
kHz
Media

Button

Listening Mode

[PURE A] Pure Audio
[DIRECT] Direct
[STEREO] Stereo

Multi
channel
176.4/
192 kHz*1 analog

CD, TV, radio,

✔
✔
✔

Multichannel PCM
except */2

DVD

✔
✔

176.4/192 kHz*1
2ch 1/0, 1+1 Multichannel
2ch

32–96 kHz
*/2
DVD

✔
✔
✔
✔

✔
✔
✔

✔

Multichannel

✔
✔
✔
✔

DVD

✔
✔
✔

✔
✔
✔
✔

✔
✔
✔

Dolby D

[SURR]

Dolby D Plus
DTS, DTS 96/24
DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix
DTS-HD High Resolution
DTS-HD Master Audio
Dolby TrueHD
DSD
Dolby PLII Movie/
Dolby PLIIx Movie*2
Dolby PLII Music/
Dolby PLIIx Music*2
Dolby PLII Game/
Dolby PLIIx Game*2

✔

✔
✔
✔

Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX
Neo:6
Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
Neural THX 5.1
Neural THX 7.1

[THX]

✔
✔
✔
✔
✔

THX Cinema*3
Dolby PLII/
Dolby PLIIx THX*3

✔*2

✔

Neo:6 THX*3

✔*3

✔

Dolby PLII THX Games
Mode

✔

Neo:6 THX Games Mode

✔

✔
✔

✔

✔
✔
✔
✔
✔

✔

THX Surround EX
THX Ultra2 Cinema
THX Music Mode
Mono
Onkyo
Original DSP

LISTENING MODE*4
[ ]/[ ]

THX Games Mode

*1.
*2.
*3.
*4.

Mono Movie
Orchestra
*3
Unplugged
Studio-Mix
TV Logic
All Ch Stereo
Full Mono
T-D

✔

DVD-Audio discs output multichannel 176.4/192 kHz PCM only via HDMI.
If there are no surround back speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
Available only when using surround speakers.
For T-D, Mono Movie, Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio-Mix, and TV Logic, PCM of 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, and 96 kHz are processed at 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
and 88.2 kHz respectively.
Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers.
Requires 7.1 speakers.

✔
✔

✔
✔
✔
✔

PR-SC885_En.book Page 81 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Using the Listening Modes—Continued
DSD, Dolby Digital, and Dolby Digital Plus Sources
DSD*1
Multichannel

Source format

3/2
Media
Button

Listening Mode

[PURE A]

Pure Audio

[DIRECT]

Direct

[STEREO] Stereo

2ch

Dolby D
Multichannel
except
*/2
*/2

SACD

Dolby Digital Plus
Multichannel

2ch

1/0, 1+1 except
*/2

DVD, DTV, etc.

*/2

2ch

1/0, 1+1

Blu-ray, HD DVD

✔

✔*2
✔

✔

✔
✔

✔

✔
✔*3

✔*3

Multichannel
Dolby D
Dolby D Plus
DTS, DTS 96/24
DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix
DTS-HD High Resolution
DTS-HD Master Audio
Dolby TrueHD

[SURR]

DSD

✔

Dolby PLII Movie/
Dolby PLIIx Movie*4
Dolby PLII Music/
Dolby PLIIx Music*4
Dolby PLII Game/
Dolby PLIIx Game*4

✔

Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX

✔
✔

Neo:6

✔

Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
Neural THX 5.1
Neural THX 7.1
THX Cinema*5
Dolby PLII/
Dolby PLIIx THX
Neo:6 THX

✔
✔

THX Ultra2 Cinema
THX Music Mode
Mono
Onkyo
Original DSP

LISTENING MODE
[ ]/[ ]

THX Games Mode
Mono Movie
Orchestra
5
Unplugged *
Studio-Mix
TV Logic
All Ch Stereo
Full Mono
T-D

✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔

✔
✔

✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔

✔
✔

✔
✔
✔
✔

✔

✔
✔
✔

✔

✔
✔
✔

✔

✔
✔
✔

Neo:6 THX Games Mode
THX Surround EX

✔

Dolby PLII THX Games Mode
[THX]

✔

✔
✔
✔
✔
✔

✔

✔
✔
✔
✔
✔

✔

✔
✔
✔
✔
✔

✔

*1. In listening modes other than DSD Direct and Pure Audio, DSD sources are converted and handled as PCM.
*2. With the Delay Enable DSD setting on the Direct screen set to No (see page 91), if the source is DSD, the Direct listening mode becomes DSD Direct,
“DSD Direct” appears on the display, and the Speaker Configuration settings are ignored.
*3. If there are no surround back speakers, depending on the input signal, Dolby Digital may be used.
*4. If there are no surround back speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
*5. Available only when using surround speakers.
Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers.
Requires 7.1 speakers.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 82 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Using the Listening Modes—Continued
TrueHD and DTS Sources
TrueHD*1
Multichannel
except
*/2
*/2

Source format

Media
Button

Listening Mode

[PURE A]

Pure Audio

[DIRECT]

Direct

[STEREO]

Stereo

DTS, DTS96/24

2ch

1/0, 1+1

except
*/2

*/2

Blu-ray, HD DVD

✔
✔
✔

1/0

DTS-ES
Discrete/
Matrix

✔
✔
✔

Multichannel

✔
✔
✔

2ch

DVD, CD, etc.

✔
✔
✔

✔

✔
✔
✔

Multichannel
Dolby D
Dolby D Plus
DTS, DTS 96/24

✔*2

DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix
DTS-HD High Resolution
DTS-HD Master Audio

✔

TrueHD

[SURR]

DSD
Dolby PLII Movie/
Dolby PLIIx Movie*3

✔
✔

✔

Dolby PLII Music/
Dolby PLIIx Music*3
Dolby PLII Game/
Dolby PLIIx Game*3

✔

Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX

✔
✔

✔

Neo:6
Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
Neural THX 5.1
Neural THX 7.1
THX Cinema*4
Dolby PLII/
Dolby PLIIx THX

✔

Neo:6 THX

✔
✔

THX Music Mode
THX Games Mode
Mono Movie
Orchestra
4
Unplugged *
Studio-Mix
TV Logic
All Ch Stereo
Full Mono
T-D

✔

✔
✔

✔

✔
✔
✔

✔

✔
✔
✔

✔

Requires 7.1 speakers.

✔
✔

✔

✔
✔
✔
✔
✔

✔

✔
✔
✔
✔

✔

192 kHz TrueHD sources are processed as 192 kHz 2-channel audio, regardless of the number of channels.
If there are no surround back speakers, DTS is used.
If there are no surround back speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
Available only when using surround speakers.
For T-D, Mono Movie, Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio-Mix, and TV Logic, DTS 96/24 is processed as DTS.
Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers.

✔
✔
✔
✔

✔

Mono
Onkyo
Original DSP

LISTENING MODE*5
[ ]/[ ]

✔

✔
✔
✔
✔

THX Surround EX

✔
✔
✔
✔
✔

Neo:6 THX Games Mode
THX Ultra2 Cinema

*1.
*2.
*3.
*4.
*5.

✔
✔

✔

Dolby PLII THX Games Mode
[THX]

✔

PR-SC885_En.book Page 83 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Using the Listening Modes—Continued
DTS-HD Sources
DTS-HD High Resolution
Source format

Multichannel
except */2
*/2
Media

Button

[PURE A] Pure Audio
[STEREO] Stereo

1/0

Blu-ray, HD DVD

Listening Mode

[DIRECT] Direct

2ch

DTS-HD Master Audio*1
Multichannel
2ch
except */2
*/2

✔
✔
✔

✔

✔
✔
✔

1/0

Blu-ray, HD DVD

✔
✔
✔

✔

✔
✔
✔

Multichannel
Dolby D
Dolby D Plus
DTS, DTS 96/24
DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix
DTS-HD High Resolution
DTS-HD Master Audio
TrueHD
DSD
[SURR]

Dolby PLII Movie/
Dolby PLIIx Movie*2
Dolby PLII Music/
Dolby PLIIx Music*2
Dolby PLII Game/
Dolby PLIIx Game*2

✔*3

✔

✔*3

✔

Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX

✔*3

Neo:6

✔

✔*3

✔

Neo:6 Music

✔*3
✔
✔

✔
✔

✔

THX Cinema*2
Dolby PLII/
Dolby PLIIx THX
Neo:6 THX

✔
✔

✔

✔
✔

✔

✔
✔
✔
✔

THX Music Mode
THX Games Mode
Mono

✔
✔

✔

THX Ultra2 Cinema

Onkyo
Original DSP

✔

Neo:6 THX Games Mode

Mono Movie
Orchestra
Unplugged
Studio-Mix
TV Logic
All Ch Stereo
Full Mono
T-D

✔

Dolby PLII THX Games
Mode
THX Surround EX

LISTENING MODE
[ ]/[ ]

✔

Neo:6 Cinema

Neural THX 7.1

*1.
*2.
*3.
*4.

✔

Neural THX 5.1

[THX]

✔

✔*3

✔
✔
✔
✔

✔*3

✔

192 kHz DTS-HD Master Audio sources are processed at 96 kHz.
If there are no surround back speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
Depending on the source (e.g., 96 kHz sources), processing may be performed after DTS decoding.
Available only when using surround speakers.
Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers.
Requires 7.1 speakers.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 84 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Using the Listening Modes—Continued
About the Listening Modes

Dolby Digital

The AV controller’s listening modes can transform your
listening room into a movie theater or concert hall, with
high fidelity and stunning surround sound.

Use this mode with DVDs that bear the Dolby Digital
logo and Dolby Digital TV broadcasts. This is the most
common digital surround-sound format, and it’ll put you
right in the middle of the action, just like being in a
movie theater or concert hall.

Pure Audio

Dolby EX

In this mode, the display and video circuitry are turned
off, minimizing possible noise sources for the ultimate in
high-fidelity audio reproduction. (As the video circuitry
is turned off, only the HDMI outputs output video.)

This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1channel playback. It’s especially suited to Dolby Digital
EX soundtracks that include a matrix-encoded surround
back channel. The additional channel adds an extra
dimension and provides an enveloping surround sound
experience, perfect for rotating and fly-by sound effects.

Note:
• The Pure Audio listening mode cannot be selected
while Zone 2 is on.
Direct

In this mode, audio from the input source is output
directly with minimal processing, providing high-fidelity reproduction. All of the source’s audio channels are
output as they are.
Stereo

Sound is output by the front left and right speakers.
Mono

Use this mode when watching an old movie with a mono
soundtrack, or use it with the foreign language
soundtracks recorded in the left and right channels of
some movies. It can also be used with DVDs or other
sources containing multiplexed audio, such as karaoke
DVDs.
Multichannel

This mode is for use with analog or PCM multichannel
sources.

Dolby Digital Plus

Developed for use with HDTV, including the new video
disc formats Blu-ray and HD DVD, this is the latest multichannel audio format from Dolby. It supports up to 7.1
channels with 48 kHz/24-bit sampling rate and signal
resolution.
Dolby TrueHD

Designed to take full advantage of the additional storage
space offered by the new Blu-ray and HD DVD disc formats, this new Dolby format offers up to 7.1 discrete
channels of lossless audio performance with 96 kHz/24bit sampling rate and signal resolution.
The AV controller supports 7.1-channel sources up to
96 kHz and 2-channel sources up to 192 kHz.
DTS NEO:6

This mode expands any 2-channel source for 7.1-channel playback. It uses seven full-bandwidth channels of
matrix decoding for matrix-encoded material, providing
a very natural and seamless surround sound experience
that fully envelops the listener.
• NEO:6 Cinema

Dolby Pro Logic IIx

This mode expands any 2-channel source for 7.1-channel playback. It provides a very natural and seamless surround-sound experience that fully envelops the listener.
As well as music and movies, video games can also benefit from the dramatic spatial effects and vivid imaging.
If you’re not using any surround back speakers, Dolby
Pro Logic II will be used instead of Dolby Pro Logic IIx.
• Dolby PLIIx Movie

Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby Surround
(Pro Logic) movie (e.g., TV, DVD, VHS).
• Dolby PLIIx Music

Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby Surround
(Pro Logic) music source (e.g., CD, radio, cassette,
TV, VHS, DVD).
• Dolby PLIIx Game

Use this mode with video games, especially those
that bear the Dolby Pro Logic II logo.

Use this mode with any stereo movie (e.g., TV,
DVD, VHS).
• NEO:6 Music

Use this mode with any stereo music source (e.g.,
CD, radio, cassette, TV, VHS, DVD).
DTS

The DTS digital surround-sound format supports up to
5.1 discrete channels and uses less compression for highfidelity reproduction. Use it with DVDs and CDs that
bear the DTS logo.
DTS 96/24

This mode is for use with DTS 96/24 sources. This is
high-resolution DTS with a 96 kHz sampling rate and
24-bit resolution, providing superior fidelity. Use it with
DVDs that bear the DTS 96/24 logo.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 85 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Using the Listening Modes—Continued
DTS-ES Discrete

THX

This mode is for use with DTS-ES Discrete soundtracks
that use a discrete surround-back channel for true
6.1/7.1-channel playback. The seven totally separate
audio channels provide better spatial imaging and 360degree sound localization, perfect for sounds that pan
across the surround channels. Use it with DVDs that bear
the DTS-ES logo, especially those with a DTS-ES Discrete soundtrack.

Founded by George Lucas, THX develops stringent standards that ensure movies are reproduced in movie theaters and home theaters just as the director intended.

DTS-ES Matrix

This mode is for use with DTS-ES Matrix soundtracks
that use a matrix-encoded back-channel for 6.1/7.1channel playback. Use it with DVDs that bear the DTSES logo.
DTS-HD High Resolution

Developed for use with HDTV, including the new video
disc formats Blu-ray and HD DVD, this is the latest multichannel audio format from DTS. It supports up to 7.1
channels with 96 kHz/24-bit sampling rate and signal
resolution.
DTS-HD Master Audio

Designed to take full advantage of the additional storage
space offered by the new Blu-ray and HD DVD disc formats, this new DTS format offers up to 7.1 discrete channels of uncompressed digital audio with 96 kHz/24-bit
sampling rate and signal resolution.
The AV controller supports 7.1-channel sources up to
96 kHz and 5.1-channel sources up to 192 kHz.

Neural THX 5.1/7.1

Neural-THX Surround employs psychoacoustic frequency domain processing, which allows delivery of a
more detailed sound stage, with superior channel separation and localization of audio elements. The Neural THX
5.1 and Neural THX 7.1 modes can expand any 2-channel stereo source for 5.1- or 7.1-channel playback,
respectively. Use them with CD, radio, cassette, TV,
VHS, DVD, and other 2-channel stereo sources, including video games. Neural-THX Surround can also be
used by broadcasters to encode and transmit surroundsound content over a stereo signal, which listeners can
enjoy as either surround sound or normal stereo. XM
Satellite Radio, for example, is using Neural-THX Surround on select channels, which the AV controller can
expand from 5.1 channels to 7.1 channels.

• THX Cinema

This mode is for watching movies, which are typically recorded and edited on the assumption that they
will be played in a sizable place like a movie theater.
It carefully optimizes the tonal and spatial characteristics of the soundtrack for reproduction in the
smaller home-theater environment. It can be used
with 2-channel sources processed with other formats, and multichannel sources. Surround back
speaker output depends on the source material and
the selected listening mode.
• THX Ultra2 Cinema

This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 7.1channel playback. It does this by analyzing the composition of the surround source, optimizing the
ambient and directional sounds to produce the surround back channel output.
• THX Music Mode

This mode is designed for use with music. It expands
5.1-channel sources for 7.1-channel playback.
• THX Games Mode

This mode is designed for use with video games. It
can expand 2-channel and 5.1-channel sources for
6.1/7.1-channel playback.
• THX Surround EX

This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1channel playback. It’s especially suited to Dolby
Digital EX sources. THX Surround EX, also known
as Dolby Digital Surround EX, is a joint development between Dolby Laboratories and THX Ltd.

DSD

DSD stands for Direct Stream Digital and is the format
used to store digital audio on Super Audio CDs (SACD).
This mode can be used with SACDs that feature multichannel audio.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 86 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Using the Listening Modes—Continued
Onkyo Original DSP Modes
Mono Movie

This mode is suitable for old movies and other mono
sources. The center speaker outputs the sound as it is,
while reverb is applied to the sound output by the other
speakers, giving presence to even mono material.
Orchestra

Suitable for classical or operatic music, this mode
emphasizes the surround channels in order to widen the
stereo image and simulates the natural reverberation of a
large hall.
Unplugged

Suitable for acoustic instruments, vocals, and jazz, this
mode emphasizes the front stereo image, giving the
impression of being right in front of the stage.
Studio-Mix

Suitable for rock or pop music, listening to music in this
mode creates a lively sound field with a powerful acoustic image, like being at a club or rock concert.
TV Logic

This mode adds realistic acoustics to TV shows produced in a TV studio, surround effects to the entire
sound, and clarity to voices.
All Ch Stereo

Ideal for background music, this mode fills the entire listening area with stereo sound from the front, surround,
and surround back speakers.
Full Mono

In this mode, all speakers output the same sound in
mono, so the sound you hear is the same regardless of
where you are within the listening room.
T-D (Theater-Dimensional)

With this mode, you can enjoy virtual 5.1 surround
sound even with only two or three speakers. It works by
controlling how sounds reach the listener’s left and right
ears. Good results may not be possible if there’s too
much reverb, so we recommend that you use this mode
in an environment with little or no natural reverb.
Note:
• Since the Onkyo original DSP modes use the Dolby
PLIIx and Neo:6 circuits for processing, when one of
these modes is selected, the PLIIx indicator, or Neo:6
indicator for multichannel sources, lights up.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 87 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Recording
This section explains how to record the input source and
how to record audio and video from separate sources.
Notes:
• The surround sound and DSP listening modes cannot
be recorded.
• Copy-protected DVDs cannot be recorded.
• Sources connected to the analog multichannel input
cannot be recorded.
• Various restrictions apply to digital recording. Refer to
the manuals supplied with your digital recording
equipment for more details.
• Digital input signals are output by only the digital outputs, and analog input signals are output by only the
analog outputs. There is no internal conversion from
digital to analog or vice versa.
• DTS signals will be recorded as noise, so don’t
attempt analog recording of DTS CDs or LDs.
• While the Pure Audio listening mode is selected, the
VCR/DVR OUT V and S jacks don’t output video signals, so select another mode when recording.

Recording from Different AV Sources
You can overdub audio onto your video recordings by
simultaneously recording audio and video from two separate sources. This is possible because only the audio
source is switched when an audio-only input source,
such as TAPE, TUNER, or CD, is selected, the video
source remains the same.
In the following example, audio from the CD player connected to the CD IN and video from the camcorder connected to the AUX 2 INPUT VIDEO jack are recorded
by the VCR connected to the VCR/DVR OUT jacks.
PUSH TO OPEN

AUX 2 INPUT

S VIDEO

L AUDIO R

VIDEO

DIGITAL

Camcorder
video signal
audio signal

Recording the Input Source
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE

RS232

Audio sources can be recorded to a recorder (e.g., cassette deck, CDR, MD) connected to the TAPE OUT or
DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT jacks. Video sources can be
recorded to a video recorder (e.g., VCR, DVR) connected to the VCR/DVR OUT jacks. See pages 26 to 42
for hookup information.

IN 4

IN 3

IN 2

OUT
MAIN

IN 1

OUT
SUB

ETHERNET

COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR

IN 2

MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT

SIRIUS

OUT 1

Y
V

REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

DVD

MONITOR
OUT V

CB/PB

IR
ZONE 2
OUT

A
IN

12V TRIGGER OUT

ASSIGNABLE

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

CR/PR
S

IN
IN 2

OUT

FRONT

CENTER

SURR

A
SURR BACK

B
FRONT

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK

(VCR/DVR)

L
IN 3

OUT

(CBL/SAT)

OPTICAL

PHONO

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

GND

BALANCE R

TAPE
BALANCE L
MONO

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

SURR R

VCR/DVR
FRONT R

SUBWOOFER

DVD
CENTER

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH

FRONT L

PRE OUT

SURR L

IN 2
(CD)

1
3

OUT

HOT

GND

COLD

1
DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 1

AUX 2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

Remote
controller
DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

AUX1

AUX2

GAME/TV

TAPE

TUNER

INPUT

Use the input selector buttons to
select the source that you want
to record.
See “Which Connections Should I
Use?” on page 27 to see which signals
can be output and recorded.
You can watch the source while recording it. The AV controller’s MASTER
VOLUME control has no effect on
recording.

CD player

VCR

Prepare the camcorder and CD player for
playback.

Prepare the VCR for recording.

Press the [AUX 2] input selector button.

Press the [CD] input selector button.
This selects the CD player as the audio source but
leaves the camcorder as the video source.

Start recording on the VCR, then start
playback on the camcorder and CD player.
Video from the camcorder and audio from the CD
player are recorded by the VCR.

PHONO

+10

2
3

On your recorder, start recording.
On the source component, start
playback.

Note:
• If you select a different input source during recording,
that input source will be recorded instead.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 88 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Onscreen Setup Menus
The onscreen setup menus appear on the connected TV and provide a convenient way to change the AV controller’s various settings. Settings are organized into eight categories on the main menu, most containing a submenu.

Menu
1.Input/Output Assign
2.Speaker Setup
3.Audio Adjust
4.Source Setup
5.ListeningMode Preset
6.Miscellaneous
7.Hardware Setup
8.Lock Setup

Menu Map
The following map shows how the setup menus are organized. Use the page numbers to locate information about items.
Main menu

Submenu

☞ pages 45–51

Menu
1.Input/Output Assign
2.Speaker Setup
3.Audio Adjust
4.Source Setup
5.Listening Mode Preset
6.Miscellaneous
7.Hardware Setup
8.Lock Setup

1.Input/Output Assign
1.Monitor Out
2.HDMI Input
3.Component Video Input
4.Digital Input
5.Analog Input

☞ pages 94–100
2.Speaker Setup
1.Speaker Settings
2.Speaker Config
3.Speaker Distance
4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings
6.THX Audio Setup

☞ page 104
6.Miscellaneous
1.Volume Setup
2.OSD Setup

☞ page 90
3.Audio Adjust
1.Tone Control
2.Direct
3.Multiplex/Mono
4.PL x/Neo:6
5.Dolby EX
6.Theater-Dimensional
7.LFE Level

☞ page 106
7.Hardware Setup
1.Remote Control
2.Zone2/Zone3
3.Tuner
4.Analog Multich
5.HDMI

☞ pages 101–102
4.Source Setup

☞ page 108
8.Lock Setup
Lock

Unlocked

DVD
1.IntelliVolume
2.A/V Sync
3.Name Edit
4.Satellite Radio
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock

☞ page 92
5.Listening Mode Preset
1.DVD
2.VCR/DVR
3.CBL/SAT
4.GAME/TV
5.AUX1
6.AUX2
7.TAPE
8.TUNER
9.CD
10.PHONO

page 44

PR-SC885_En.book Page 89 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Adjusting the Listening Modes
Using the Late Night Function
ON

STANDBY

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

With the Late Night function, you can reduce the
dynamic range of Dolby Digital material so that you can
still hear quiet parts even when listening at low volume
levels—ideal for watching movies late at night when you
don’t want to disturb anyone.

TV
INPUT

PHONO

D. TUN

+10

TV VOL

CLEAR

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

RECEIVER

MACRO

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

CABLE

ZONE2

CDR/MD
DOCK

SAT

TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

RECEIVER

SLEEP
P
TO

U
MEN

L NIGHT

MEN
U

ENTER

PREV
CH

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

SETUP

RECEIVER

ID E

TUP

E XI

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

REC

MUTING

PLAYLIST

SURR
AUDIO

PURE A

DIRECT

TEST TONE

SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
THX

ALL ST

LEVEL-

LEVEL+

AUDIO SEL

L NIGHT

Re-EQ

VCR

DVD

HDD

CH SEL

OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF

RC-690M

Re-EQ
L NIGHT

Using the Re-EQ Function
With the Re-EQ function, you can compensate a
soundtrack whose high-frequency content is too harsh,
making it more suitable for home theater viewing.
This function can be used with the following listening
modes: Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Pro
Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, DTS, DTSES, DTS Neo:6 Cinema, DTS 96/24, THX Cinema,
THX Surround EX, THX Ultra2 Cinema, and Multichannel.

RECEIVER

Off: Late Night function off
(default).
Low: Small reduction in dynamic
range.
High: Large reduction in dynamic
range.
For Dolby TrueHD sources, the options
are:

RANDOM

LISTENING MODE
STEREO
REPEAT

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, and then press the
[L NIGHT] button repeatedly.
For Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital
Plus sources, the options are:

Auto: The dynamic range is controlled automatically based
on the source material and the
current volume setting
(default).
Off: Late Night function off.
On: Late Night function on.
Notes:
• The Late Night function can be used only when the
input source is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, or
Dolby TrueHD.
• The effect of the Late Night function depends on the
material that you are playing and the intention of the
original sound designer, and with some material there
will be little or no effect when you select the different
options.
• The Late Night function is set to Off when the AV controller is set to Standby. For Dolby TrueHD sources, it
will be set to Auto.

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[Re-EQ] button.
Press the [Re-EQ] button again to turn
off the Re-EQ function.

Re-EQ

PR-SC885_En.book Page 90 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Adjusting the Listening Modes—Continued
Audio Adjust
With the Audio Adjust functions and settings, you can
adjust the sound and listening modes as you like.

RECEIVER

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

TUP

2
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “3. Audio
Adjust,” and then press [ENTER].
The Audio Adjust menu appears.

Tone Control Settings
You can adjust the tone (bass and treble) of the front,
center, surround, and surround back speakers individually. For the subwoofer, you can adjust the bass.
■ Bass
You can boost or cut low-frequency sounds from –10 dB
to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.
■ Treble
You can boost or cut high-frequency sounds from
–10 dB to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.
Note:
• The tone control circuits are bypassed when the Direct
or Pure Audio listening mode is selected.
Adjusting the Tone on the AV Controller

3.Audio Adjust

ENTER

1.Tone Control
2.Direct
3.Multiplex/Mono
4.PL x/Neo:6
5.Dolby EX
6.Theater-Dimensional
7.LFE Level

2
MASTER VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

STANDBY
ZONE 2
ZONE 3

PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 1

AUX 2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

ZONE 2
PHONES

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

STEREO

TUNING

THX

POWER

RT/PTY/TP MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

RETURN

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

SETUP
PRESET

CLEAR

OFF

ZONE 3

DIGITAL INPUT

LISTENING MODE
TUNING

3
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an item, and
then press [ENTER].
The screen for that item appears.

ENTER

4
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an option, and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to change it.
The Audio Adjust menu items are
explained below.

ENTER

5
SE

TUP

When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
Setup closes.

TONE

ENTER

S VIDEO

VIDEO

L AUDIO R

DIGITAL

Press the AV controller’s [TONE]
button repeatedly to select Bass
or Treble for Front, Center, Surround, SurrBack, or Subwoofer.
Use the Up [ ] and Down [
buttons to adjust.

]

Notes:
• The tone cannot be adjusted on the AV controller
when the Direct or Pure Audio listening mode is
selected.
• The tone control settings do not apply to the THX listening modes.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 91 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Adjusting the Listening Modes—Continued
Direct Setting

PLIIx/Neo:6 Settings

Delay Enable

PLIIx Music (2 ch Input)

■ DSD
This setting determines whether or not DSD (SACD)
audio signals are passed through the DSP for A/V Sync,
delay, etc., processing when the Direct listening mode is
selected.
No: DSD signals are not processed by the DSP.
Yes: DSD signals are processed by the DSP.

Multiplex/Mono Settings
Multiplex

■ Input Ch
This setting determines which channel of a stereo multiplex source is output. Use it to select audio channels or
languages with multiplex sources, multilingual TV
broadcasts, and so on.
Main: The main channel is output (default).
Sub: The sub channel is output.
Main/Sub: Both the main and sub channels are output.
Mono

■ Input Ch
This setting determines which channel is output when
the Mono listening mode is used with a stereo source.
L+R: Both the left and right channels are output
(default).
L: Only the left channel is output.
R: Only the right channel is output.
■ Output Speaker
This setting determines which speakers output mono
audio when the Mono listening mode is selected.
L/R: Mono audio is output by the front left and right
speakers.
C: Mono audio is output by the center speaker
(default).

These settings apply to only 2-channel stereo sources.
If you’re not using any surround back speakers, these
settings apply to Dolby Pro Logic II, not Dolby Pro
Logic IIx.
■ Panorama
With this setting, you can broaden the width of the front
stereo image when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music
listening mode.
On: Panorama function on.
Off: Panorama function off (default).
■ Dimension
With this setting, you can move the sound field forward
or backward when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music
listening mode. It can be adjusted from –3 to +3. The
default value is 0. Higher settings move the sound field
forward. Lower settings move it backward.
If the stereo image feels too wide, or there’s too much
surround sound, move the sound field forward to
improve the balance. Conversely, if the stereo image
feels like it’s in mono, or there’s not enough surround
sound, move it backward.
■ Center Width
With this setting, you can adjust the width of the sound
from the center speaker when using the Dolby Pro Logic
IIx Music listening mode. Normally, if you’re using a
center speaker, the center channel sound is output by
only the center speaker. (If you’re not using a center
speaker, the center channel sound will be distributed to
the front left and right speakers to create a phantom center). This setting controls the front left, right, and center
mix, allowing you to adjust the weight of the center
channel sound. It can be adjusted from 0 to 7. The default
value is 3.
Neo:6 Music

■ Center Image
The DTS Neo:6 Music listening mode creates 6-channel
surround sound from 2-channel stereo sources. With this
setting, you can specify by how much the front left and
right channel output is attenuated in order to create the
center channel. It can be adjusted from 0 to 5. The
default value is 3.
When set to 0, the front left and right channel output is
attenuated by half (–6 dB), giving the impression that the
sound is located centrally. This setting works well when
the listening position is considerably off center. When
set to 5, the front left and right channels are not attenuated, maintaining the original stereo balance.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 92 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Adjusting the Listening Modes—Continued
■ DSD
Sets the level of the LFE channel for DSD sources.

Dolby Digital Settings
■ Dolby EX
This setting determines how Dolby EX signals are handled.
Auto: When the source is Dolby EX, you can select
the Dolby EX or THX Surround EX listening
mode.
Manual: When the source is Dolby EX, you can select
any of the listening modes compatible with this
format (e.g., Dolby EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIx,
etc.).

T–D (Theater-Dimensional) Setting
■ Listening Angle
With this setting, you can optimize the Theater-Dimensional listening mode by specifying the angle of the front
left and right speakers relative to the listening position.
Ideally, the front left and right speakers should be equidistant from the listening position and at an angle close
to one of the two available settings.

■ Multich PCM
Sets the level of the LFE channel for multichannel PCM
sources. (Multichannel PCM is input via HDMI.)

Listening Mode Presets
On the Listening Mode Preset menu, you can specify a
default listening mode for each of the audio formats supported by each input selector. The AV controller will
then select the listening mode automatically depending
on the format of the input signal. You can still select the
other listening modes, although the default listening
mode will be used the next time you turn on the AV controller.
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO

VCR

CABLE

ZONE3

ZONE2

CDR/MD
DOCK

SAT

RECEIVER

SLEEP
P
TO

U
MEN

MEN
U

ENTER

Front right speaker

SETUP

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

Front left speaker

REMOTE MODE
DVD

PREV
CH

ID E

TUP

DISPLAY

VOL

T
E XI

RN
RE T U
MUTING

30˚

1
Narrow: Select if the angle is less than 30 degrees.
Wide: Select if the angle is greater than 30 degrees.

RECEIVER

LFE Level Settings
With these settings, you can set the level of the LFE
(Low Frequency Effects) channel individually for Dolby
Digital, DTS, and multichannel PCM sources. The level
can be set to –∞, –20 dB, –10 dB, or 0 dB (default).
If you find that low-frequency effects are too loud when
using one of these sources, change the setting to –20 dB
or –∞ dB.
■ Dolby Digital
Sets the level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital
sources.
■ DTS
Sets the level of the LFE channel for DTS sources.
■ Dolby TrueHD
Sets the level of the LFE channel for Dolby TrueHD
sources.
■ DTS-HD Master Audio
Sets the level of the LFE channel for DTS-HD Master
Audio sources.

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

TUP

2
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “5. Listening
Mode Preset,” and then press
[ENTER].
The Listening Mode Preset menu
appears.
5.Listening Mode Preset

ENTER

1.DVD
2.VCR/DVR
3.CBL/SAT
4.GAME/TV
5.AUX1
6.AUX2
7.TAPE
8.TUNER
9.CD
10.PHONO

PR-SC885_En.book Page 93 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Adjusting the Listening Modes—Continued

3
ENTER

Dolby TrueHD: Specifies the default
listening mode for Dolby TrueHD
sources, such as Blu-ray or HD DVD
(input via HDMI).

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an input selector, and then press [ENTER].
The audio formats supported by that
input selector appear.

DTS-HD Master Audio: Specifies the
default listening mode for DTS-HD
Master Audio sources, such as Blu-ray
or HD DVD (input via HDMI).

5-x.Listening Mode Preset

ENTER

Analog/PCM
Dolby Digital
DTS
D.F.2ch
D.F.Mono

Last
Last
Last
Last
Last

Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid

If the input selector is assigned to an
HDMI IN, use the Down [ ] button to
select the audio formats shown on the
following screen.

DSD Multi: Specifies the default listening mode for DSD multichannel
sources, such as SACD.

5
SE

TUP

When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
Setup closes.

5-x.Listening Mode Preset
Multich PCM
192k/176.4k
Dolby True HD
DTS-HD Master Audio
DSD

Last
Last
Last
Last
Last

Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid

For the TUNER input selector, Analog
is the only format available.

4
ENTER

ENTER

Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV controller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an audio format, and use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select a listening mode.
Only listening modes compatible with
the audio format can be selected (see
page 80).
Analog/PCM: Specifies the default listening mode for analog and PCM
sources.
Dolby Digital: Specifies the default listening mode for Dolby Digital sources.
DTS: Specifies the default listening
mode for DTS sources.
D.F. 2ch: Specifies the default listening
mode for 2-channel (2/0) stereo sources
in a digital format, such as Dolby Digital or DTS.
D.F. Mono: Specifies the default listening mode for mono sources in a digital
format, such as Dolby Digital or DTS.
Multich PCM: Specifies the default
listening mode for multichannel PCM
sources, such as DVD-Audio (input via
HDMI).
192/176.4k: Specifies the default listening mode for high resolution
192 kHz and 176.4 kHz digital sources,
such as DVD-Audio.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 94 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Advanced Setup
Speaker Setup

This section explains items on the Speaker Config menu.
Some of the speaker settings are set automatically by the
Automatic Speaker Setup function (see page 52).

ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “2. Speaker
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Speaker Setup menu appears.
2.Speaker Setup

INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

ENTER

ZONE2

CDR/MD
TV

CABLE

DOCK

SAT

RECEIVER

SLEEP

ENU
PM

MEN
U

ENTER

PREV
CH

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

SETUP

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

1.Speaker Settings
2.Speaker Config
3.Speaker Distance
4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings
6.THX Audio Setup

ID E

TUP

E XI

N
TUR

DISPLAY

MUTING

ENTER

REC

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “2. Speaker
Config,” and then press [ENTER].
The Speaker Config screen appears.
2-2.Speaker Config

Speaker Settings
ENTER

See “Speaker Settings” on page 44.

Subwoofer
Front
Center
Surround
Surr Back
Surr Back Ch
LPF of LFE
Double Bass

Yes
Full Band
100Hz
100Hz
100Hz
2ch
120Hz
On

Speaker Configuration
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 52).

4
ENTER

With the Speaker Configuration settings, you can specify
which speakers are connected and a crossover frequency
for each speaker.
The following crossover frequencies can be specified:
Full Band, 40 Hz, 45 Hz, 50 Hz, 55 Hz, 60 Hz, 70 Hz,
80 Hz (THX), 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 130 Hz,
150 Hz, or 200 Hz.
Specify Full Band for speakers that can output low-frequency bass sounds adequately, for example, speakers
with a good sized woofer. For smaller speakers, specify
a crossover frequency. Sounds below the crossover frequency will then be output by the subwoofer instead of
the speaker. Refer to your speakers’ manuals to determine the optimum crossover frequencies.
If you’re using THX-certified speakers, specify
80 Hz (THX) for all speakers.

1
RECEIVER

TUP

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Subwoofer,”
and then use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
Yes: Select if a subwoofer is connected.
No: Select if no subwoofer is connected.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 95 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued

5
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Front,” and
then use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select a
crossover frequency.
Note:
• Fixed at Full Band if Subwoofer
(step 4) is set to No.

ENTER

9
ENTER

ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Surr Back Ch,”
and then use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
1ch: Select if one surround back
speaker is connected.
2ch: Select if two (left and right)
surround back speakers are
connected.
Note:
• Cannot be set if Speaker Type is set
to Bi-Amp (page 44) or SurrBack is
set to None (step 8).

6
ENTER

ENTER

7
ENTER

ENTER

8
ENTER

ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Center,” and
then use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select a
crossover frequency.
If no center speaker is connected, select
None.

Continue with step 10 on the next page.

Note:
• Cannot select Full Band if Front
(step 5) is set to anything other than
Full Band.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Surround,” and
then use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select a
crossover frequency.
If no surround left and right speakers
are connected, select None.
Note:
• Cannot select Full Band if Front
(step 5) is set to anything other than
Full Band.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Surr Back,”
and then use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select a
crossover frequency.
If no surround back speakers are connected, select None.
Notes:
• Cannot be set if Speaker Type is set
to Bi-Amp (page 44) or Surround is
set to None (step 7).
• Cannot select Full Band if Surround
(step 7) is set to anything other than
Full Band.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 96 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued
Low-Pass Filter for the LFE Channel

Double Bass

This setting is not set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 52).

With this setting, you can specify the cutoff frequency of
the LFE channel’s low-pass filter (LPF), which can be
used to filter out unwanted hum. The LPF only applies to
sources that use the LFE channel.

With this setting, you can boost bass output by feeding
front left and right channel bass sounds to the subwoofer.

* If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select
80 Hz (THX).

10
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “LPF of LFE,”
and then use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select a lowpass filter frequency.
The following low-pass filter frequencies can be selected: 80 Hz (THX),
90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, or 120 Hz.

This setting can only be made if the Subwoofer setting in
step 4 is set to Yes, and the Front setting in step 5 is set
to Full Band.
* If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select Off
(THX).

11
ENTER

ENTER

Continue with step 11 in the next column.

12
SE

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Double Bass,”
and then use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
Off (THX): The subwoofer only outputs the LFE channel.
On: In addition to LFE channel
sounds, the subwoofer outputs front left and right channel bass sounds.

Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
TUP

Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV controller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 97 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued
Speaker Distance

These settings are set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 52).

ENTER

With the Speaker Distance settings, you can specify the
distance from each speaker to the listening position.

1
RECEIVER

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

ENTER

TUP

ENTER

2
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “2. Speaker
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Speaker Setup menu appears.
ENTER

2.Speaker Setup

ENTER

3
ENTER

1.Speaker Settings
2.Speaker Config
3.Speaker Distance
4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings
6.THX Audio Setup

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “3. Speaker Distance,” and then press [ENTER].
The Speaker Distance screen appears.
2-3.Speaker Distance

ENTER

Unit
Left
Center
Right
Surr Right
Surr Back R
Surr Back L
Surr Left
Subwoofer

feet
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft

Note:
• Speakers that you set to No or None
in the Speaker Configuration
(page 94) cannot be selected.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Unit,” and then
use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select:
feet: Select if you want to enter
distances in feet. Can be set
from 0.2 to 30 feet in 0.2-foot
steps.
meters: Select if you want to enter
distances in meters. Can be
set from 0.06 to 9 meters in
0.06-meter steps.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a speaker, and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to specify the distance.
Specify the distance from the speaker
to your listening position.
Notes:
• The Center distance cannot be set if
Center is set to None in the Speaker
Configuration (page 94).
• The Surr Right and Surr Left distances cannot be set if Surround is set
to None in the Speaker Configuration
(page 94).
• The Surr Back R and Surr Back L
distances cannot be set if Speaker
Type is set to Bi-Amp (page 44) or
Surr Back is set to None in the
Speaker Configuration (page 94).
• The Subwoofer distance cannot be
set if Subwoofer is set to No (step 4).

Repeat step 5 for each speaker.

Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
SE

TUP

Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV controller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 98 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued
Speaker Level Calibration

These settings are set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 52).

ENTER

With the Level Calibration settings, you can adjust the
level of each speaker while listening to the test tone so
that the volume of each speaker is the same at the listening position.

ENTER

RECEIVER

TUP
ENTER

2
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “2. Speaker
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Speaker Setup menu appears.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a speaker, and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to adjust the level.
Levels can be adjusted from –12 to
+12 dB in 0.5 dB steps (–15 to +12 dB
for the subwoofer).

Repeat step 4 for each speaker
so that the volume of the test
tone from each speaker is the
same.
If you’re using a handheld sound level
meter, adjust the level of each speaker
so that it reads 75 dB SPL at the listening position, measured with C-weighting and slow reading.

Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.

2.Speaker Setup

ENTER

-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-15.0dB

Note:
• Levels cannot be adjusted for speakers set to No or None in the Speaker
Configuration (page 94).

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

4
SE

2-4.Level Calibration
Left
Center
Right
Surr Right
Surr Back R
Surr Back L
Surr Left
Subwoofer

Note:
• The test tone is output at the standard level for THX,
which is 0 dB (absolute volume setting 82). If you normally listen at volume settings below this, be careful
because the test tone will be much louder.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “4. Level Calibration,” and then press
[ENTER].
The Level Calibration screen appears
and the pink noise test tone is output by
the front left speaker.

1.Speaker Settings
2.Speaker Config
3.Speaker Distance
4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings
6.THX Audio Setup

TUP

Note:
• Speaker levels can also be adjusted by using the dedicated buttons on the remote controller. Press the
[TEST TONE] button to output the test tone. Use the
[CH SEL] button to select each speaker, and use the
[LEVEL–] and [LEVEL+] buttons to adjust the level.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 99 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued
Equalizer Settings

These settings are set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 52).

ENTER

With the Equalizer settings, you can adjust the tone of
speakers individually with a 15-band equalizer. The volume of each speaker can be set on page 98.

1
RECEIVER

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

5
TUP
ENTER

2
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “2. Speaker
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Speaker Setup menu appears.

Use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to set the “Equalizer”
option to:
Off: Equalizer off, flat response.
Manual: The equalizer for each
speaker can be set manually.
Audyssey:The equalizer for each
speaker is set automatically
by the Automatic Speaker
Setup function.
If you selected Manual, continue with
the next step. If you selected Off or
Audyssey, go to step 8.
Use the Down [ ] button to
select “Channel,” and then use
the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select the speaker.
You can select: Front, Center, Surround, Surr Back, or Subwoofer.

ENTER

2.Speaker Setup

ENTER

1.Speaker Settings
2.Speaker Config
3.Speaker Distance
4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings
6.THX Audio Setup

6
ENTER

3
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “5. Equalizer
Settings,” and then press
[ENTER].
The Equalizer Settings screen appears.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ] buttons move between the two screens.

ENTER

2-5.Equalizer Settings
Equalizer
Channel
25Hz
40Hz
63Hz
100Hz
160Hz
250Hz
400Hz

Manual
Front
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB

ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a frequency,
and use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to cut or boost
that frequency.
You can select: 25 Hz, 40 Hz, 63 Hz,
100 Hz, 160 Hz, 250 Hz, 400 Hz,
630 Hz, 1000 Hz, 1600 Hz, 2500 Hz,
4000 Hz, 6300 Hz, 10000 Hz, or
16000 Hz. And for the subwoofer,
25 Hz, 40 Hz, 63 Hz, 100 Hz, or
160 Hz.
Each band can be cut or boosted from
–6 dB to +6 dB in 1 dB steps.
Tip: Low frequencies, such as 160 Hz,
affect bass sounds; high frequencies,
such as 6300 Hz, affect treble sounds.

2-5.Equalizer Settings
630Hz
1000Hz
1600Hz
2500Hz
4000Hz
6300Hz
10000Hz
16000Hz

0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB

PR-SC885_En.book Page 100 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued

7
ENTER

Use the Up [ ] button to select
“Channel” again, and use the
Left and Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to
select another speaker.
Repeat steps 6 and 7 for each speaker.

2
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “2. Speaker
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Speaker Setup menu appears.
2.Speaker Setup

ENTER
ENTER

3
8

Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
SE

ENTER

1.Speaker Settings
2.Speaker Config
3.Speaker Distance
4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings
6.THX Audio Setup

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “6. THX Audio
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The THX Audio Setup screen appears.

TUP
2-6.THX Audio Setup
Surr Back Sp Spacing
THX Subwoofer
BGC

1ft-4ft
Yes
Off

ENTER

Notes:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV controller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
• The Equalizer settings have no effect on 176.4/
192 kHz input signals.

4
ENTER

THX Audio Setup
These settings are not set automatically by the Automatic Speaker Setup function (see page 52).
With the Surr Back Sp Spacing setting, you can specify
the distance between your surround back speakers.
If you’re using a THX-certified subwoofer, set the THX
Subwoofer setting to Yes. You can then apply THX’s
Boundary Gain Compensation (BGC) to compensate the
perceived exaggeration of low frequencies for listeners
sitting very close to a room boundary (i.e., wall).

1
RECEIVER

100

TUP

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Surr Back Sp
Spacing,” and use the Left and
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to specify
the distance between your surround back speakers:
< 1 ft (< 0.3 m) (Default): Select this if
your surround back speakers are
between 0 and 1 foot (0–30 cm) apart.
1–4 ft (0.3–1.2 m): Select this if your
surround back speakers are between 1
and 4 feet (0.3–1.2 m) apart.
>4 ft (>1.2 m): Select this if your surround back speakers are more than 4
feet (1.2 m) apart.
Note:
• This setting is only available if the
Surr Back Ch setting in the Speaker
Configuration is set to 2ch (page 95).

PR-SC885_En.book Page 101 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “THX Subwoofer,” and use the Left and
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
No: Select this if you do not have
a THX-certified subwoofer.
Yes: Select this if you have a THXcertified subwoofer.

ENTER

2
SE

Press the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
TUP

ENTER
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “BGC,” and use
the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
Off: Select this to turn off BGC.
On: Select this to turn on BGC.

ENTER

Note:
• This setting is only available if THX
Subwoofer is set to Yes (step 5).

ENTER

4.Source Setup
ENTER

4
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “4. Source
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Source Setup menu appears. The
name of the currently selected input
selector is displayed in a box.
DVD
1.IntelliVolume
2.A/V Sync
3.Name Edit
4.Satellite Radio
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an item, and
then press [ENTER].
The screen for that item appears.

Press the [SETUP] button.
The setup menu closes.
SE

TUP

ENTER

Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV controller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.

5
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an option, and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to change it.
The Source Setup menu items are
explained below.

Source Setup
ENTER

This section explains items on the Source Setup menu.
Items can be set individually for each input selector.

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, and then use the
input selector buttons to select
an input source.

RECEIVER

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

+10

101

PR-SC885_En.book Page 102 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued

6
SE

When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
Setup closes.

TUP

Name Edit
You can enter a custom name for each individual input
selector and radio preset for easy identification. When
selected, the custom name will appear on the display.

Select the input selector to which
you want to give a custom name.
To name a radio preset, use the
[TUNER] button to select AM or FM,
and then select the preset.

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.

IntelliVolume
With IntelliVolume, you can set the input level for each
input selector individually. This is useful if one of your
source components is louder or quieter than the others.
Use the Left and Right [

]/[

RECEIVER

] buttons to set the level.

If a component is noticeably louder than the others, use
the Left [ ] button to reduce its input level. If it’s
noticeably quieter, use the Right [ ] button to increase
its input level. The input level can be adjusted from
–12 dB to +12 dB in 1 dB steps.
Note:
• IntelliVolume does not apply for Zone 2 or Zone 3.

TUP

A/V Sync
ENTER

When using your DVD player’s progressive scanning
function, you may find that the picture and sound are out
of sync. With the A/V Sync setting, you can correct this
by applying a delay to the audio signal. The delay can be
set from 0 to 250 milliseconds (msec) in 5 millisecond
steps.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ] buttons to select an
input selector, and use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to set the delay.
To view the TV picture while setting the delay, press
[ENTER].

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “4. Source
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Source Setup menu appears.
4.Source Setup

ENTER

4
ENTER

4-2.A/V Sync

DVD
1.IntelliVolume
2.A/V Sync
3.Name Edit
4.Satellite Radio
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Name Edit,”
and then press [ENTER].
The Name Edit screen appears.

DVD
A/V Sync
(HDMI LipSync

4-3.Name Edit

100msec
60msec)

DVD
Display
Name

Press Enter to see picture

Default
[

]

ENTER

If HDMI Lip Sync is enabled (see page 107), and your
TV or display supports HDMI Lip Sync, the displayed
delay time will be the A/V Sync delay time. The HDMI
Lip Sync delay time is displayed underneath in parentheses.
Note:
• A/V Sync cannot be set when the Pure Audio listening
mode is selected, or when the Direct listening mode is
used with an analog input source.

102

If you’re naming an item for the very
first time, go to step 6.
If the item already has a name, you can
select Default or Custom in step 5.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 103 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued

5
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Display,” and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select:
Default: The default name is displayed.
Custom: The custom name is displayed.

8
ENTER

When you’ve finished, use the
arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] buttons
to display the following screen,
select “OK,” and then press
[ENTER].
4-3.Name Edit
Name

ENTER

A B C D
N O P Q
a b c d
n o p q

ENTER

[

R S T U
e f g h
r s t u
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
( ) + * = / , :

When Default is selected, the station’s
frequency appears on the display when
a radio preset is selected.

]

E F G H I J K L M
V W X Y Z
i j k o m
v w x y z
8 9 - . ‘
; ! ? _
OK

6
ENTER

Press the Down [ ] button to
select “Name,” and then press
[ENTER] to open the character
input screen.
Name

ENTER

A B C D
N O P Q
a b c d
n o p q

[

ENTER

Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
TUP

]

E F G H I J K L M

R S T
e f g
r s t
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
( ) + * = / ,

U V W X Y Z
h i j k o m
u v w x y z
7 8 9 - . ‘
: ; ! ? _

“OK”

4-3.Name Edit

Cancel

Use the arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a character, and
then press [ENTER].
Repeat this step to enter up to 10
characters.
To correct a character:
1. Use the arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]
buttons to select the incorrect character, and then press [ENTER]. The
character input screen opens.
2. Use the arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]
buttons to select the correct character, and then press [ENTER].

Notes:
• To store a name, you must select “OK” and press
[ENTER] in step 7, otherwise it will not be saved.
• You cannot enter a custom name for XM or SIRIUS
radio presets.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV controller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.

Satellite Radio
This item is for use with satellite radio. It’s not available
if Satellite Radio is set to None (see page 107). See
pages 62–70 for more information.

SIRIUS Parental Lock
This item is for use with SIRIUS Satellite Radio. It’s not
available if Satellite Radio is set to None or XM (see
page 107). See page 70 for more information.

103

PR-SC885_En.book Page 104 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued
Miscellaneous Setup

This section explains items on the Miscellaneous menu.
ENTER
+10

CLEAR

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

MACRO

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an item, and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to change it.
The items are explained below.

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

CABLE

ZONE2

CDR/MD
DOCK

SAT

TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

SLEEP
P
TO

U
MEN

PREV
CH

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

ID E

TUP

XI T

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

REC

1
RECEIVER

ENTER

MEN
U

ENTER
SETUP

RECEIVER

MUTING

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

TUP

2
ENTER

3
ENTER

ENTER

104

Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV controller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.

Volume Setup

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select
“6. Miscellaneous,” and then
press [ENTER].
The Miscellaneous menu appears.
6.Miscellaneous

ENTER

TUP

When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
Setup closes.

1.Volume Setup
2.OSD Setup
3.12V Trigger A
4.12V Trigger B
5.12V Trigger C

Setup
Setup
Setup

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an item, and
then press [ENTER].
The screen for that item appears.

■ Volume Display
With this setting, you can choose how the volume level
is displayed.
Absolute: Display range is Min, 0.5 through 99.5,
Max.
Relative: Display range is –∞ dB, –81.5 dB,
–81.0 dB through +18.0 dB.
The absolute value 82 is equivalent to the relative value
0 dB.
■ Muting Level
This setting determines how much the output is muted
when the Muting function is used (see page 76). It can be
set to –∞ dB (fully muted) or from –50 dB to –10 dB in
10 dB steps.
■ Maximum Volume
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume.
When the Volume Display setting is set to Absolute, the
Maximum Volume range is Off, 99 to 50. When it’s set
to Relative, the range is Off, +17 dB to –32 dB. To disable this setting, select Off.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 105 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued
■ Power On Volume
This setting determines what the volume will be each
time the AV controller is turned on.
When the Volume Display preference is set to Absolute,
the range is Last, Min, 1 to Max. When it’s set to Relative, the range is Last, –∞ dB, –81 dB to +18 dB.
To use the same volume level as when the AV controller
was last turned off, select Last.
Note:
• The Power On Volume setting cannot be set higher
than the Maximum Volume setting.
■ Headphone Level
With this setting, you can offset the headphone volume
relative to the main volume. This is useful if your headphones are too loud or too quiet at the volume setting you
usually use when listening through your speakers. The
headphone level can be set from –12 dB to +12 dB.
■ Zone2 Maximum Volume
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume for
Zone 2.
When the Volume Display setting is set to Absolute, the
Maximum Volume range is Off, 99 to 50. When it’s set
to Relative, the range is Off, +17 dB to –32 dB. To disable this setting, select Off.

OSD Setup
■ Immediate Display
This setting determines whether operation details are
displayed onscreen immediately after an AV controller
function is used.
On: Displayed (default).
Off: Not displayed.
Even if On is selected, operation details are not output if
the input source is connected to a COMPONENT
VIDEO IN or HDMI IN.
For optimal video performance, THX recommends that
Immediate Display be turned off.
■ Monitor Type
With this setting, you can specify the aspect ratio of your
TV so that menus are displayed properly.
4:3: Select if your TV is 4:3 (default).
16:9: Select if your TV is 16:9.
■ Display Position
This setting determines where on the screen operation
details are displayed.
Bottom: Bottom of the screen (default).
Top: Top of the screen.

■ Zone2 Power On Volume
This setting determines what the volume will be for
Zone 2 each time the AV controller is turned on.

■ Language
This setting determines the language used for the
onscreen setup menus. You can select: English, German,
French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Swedish, or Japanese.

When the Volume Display preference is set to Absolute,
the range is Last, Min, 1 to Max. When it’s set to Relative, the range is Last, –∞ dB, –81 dB to +18 dB.

12V Trigger A/B/C Setup

To use the same volume level as when the AV controller
was last turned off, select Last.

See “Using the 12V Triggers” on page 114.

■ Zone3 Maximum Volume
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume for
Zone 3.
When the Volume Display setting is set to Absolute, the
Maximum Volume range is Off, 99 to 50. When it’s set
to Relative, the range is Off, +17 dB to –32 dB. To disable this setting, select Off.
■ Zone3 Power On Volume
This setting determines what the volume will be for
Zone 3 each time the AV controller is turned on.
When the Volume Display preference is set to Absolute,
the range is Last, Min, 1 to Max. When it’s set to Relative, the range is Last, –∞ dB, –81 dB to +18 dB.
To use the same volume level as when the AV controller
was last turned off, select Last.

105

PR-SC885_En.book Page 106 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued
Hardware Setup

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an item, and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to change it.
The items are explained below.

This section explains items on the Hardware menu.
ENTER

Remote
indicator
ON

STANDBY

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TV
INPUT

Number
buttons

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

D. TUN

+10

INPUT

5
SE

When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
Setup closes.

TUP

TV VOL

CLEAR

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

MACRO

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

ZONE2

CDR/MD
TV

CABLE

DOCK

SAT

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

SLEEP
P
TO

U
MEN

MEN
U

ENTER

PREV
CH

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

SETUP

ID E

TUP

REC

RECEIVER

Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV controller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.

Remote Control

XI T

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

RECEIVER

MUTING

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

■ Remote ID
When several Onkyo components are used in the same
room, their remote ID codes may overlap. To differentiate the AV controller from the other components, you
can change its remote ID from 1, the default, to 2 or 3.
Note:
• If you do change the AV controller’s remote ID, be
sure to change the remote controller to the same ID
(see below), otherwise, you won’t be able to control it
with the remote controller.
Changing the Remote Controller’s ID

TUP

While holding down the
[RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE button, press the TV [INPUT] button.
The Remote indicator flashes four
times.

RECEIVER

2
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Hardware Setup menu appears.
7.Hardware Setup

ENTER

3
ENTER

1.Remote Control
2.Zone2/Zone3
3.Tuner
4.Analog Multich
5.HDMI

2
DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

Use the number buttons to enter
ID 1, 2, or 3.
The Remote indicator flashes twice.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an item, and
then press [ENTER].
The screen for that item appears.

Zone 2 and Zone 3
See “Zone 2 and Zone 3” on page 109.

106

PR-SC885_En.book Page 107 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued
Tuner
■ Satellite Radio
If you connect an XM Satellite Radio antenna or SIRIUS
Satellite Radio antenna to the AV controller (both sold
separately), set this setting to XM or SIRIUS respectively. If you connect both types of antenna, select
XM/SIRIUS. Otherwise, select None. See the separate
Satellite Radio Guide for more information.

Analog Multich
■ Subwoofer Input Sensitivity
Some DVD players output the LFE channel from their
analog subwoofer output at 15 dB higher than normal.
With this setting, you can change the AV controller’s
subwoofer sensitivity to match your DVD player. Note
that this setting only affects signals connected to the AV
controller’s MULTI CH SUBWOOFER jack.
You can select 0 dB, 5 dB, 10 dB, or 15 dB.
If you find that your subwoofer is too loud, try the 10 dB
or 15 dB setting.

HDMI
■ HDMI Audio Out
This setting determines whether audio received by an
HDMI input is output by the HDMI outputs. You may
want to change this setting to On if your TV is connected
to an HDMI output and you want to listen to audio from
an HDMI component through your TV’s speakers. Normally, it should be set to Off.
Off: HDMI audio is not output (default).
On: HDMI audio is output.
Notes:
• If On is selected and the signal can be output by the
TV, the AV controller will output no sound through its
speakers.
• When TV Control is enabled, this setting is set to
Auto.
• With some TVs and input signals, no sound may be
output even if On is selected.
• When the HDMI Audio Out setting is set to On, or TV
Control is set to Enable and you’re listening through
your TV’s speakers (see page 37), if you turn up the
AV controller’s volume control, the sound will be output by the AV controller’s speakers. To stop the AV
controller’s speakers producing sound, change the settings, change your TV’s settings, or turn down the AV
controller’s volume.

■ Lip Sync
The Lip Sync function can automatically synchronize
HDMI audio and video that’s gotten out of sync due to
the complex digital video processing being performed by
your HDMI-compatible TV. With HDMI Lip Sync, the
audio delay required to synchronize the audio and video
is calculated and applied automatically by the AV controller.
Disable: HDMI lip sync disabled.
Enable: HDMI lip sync enabled.
Notes:
• This function works only if your HDMI-compatible
TV supports HDMI Lip Sync.
• You can check the amount of delay being applied by
the HDMI Lip Sync function on the A/V Sync screen
(see page 102).
■ xvYCC
If your HDMI source and HDMI-compatible TV both
support the xvYCC color standard, you can enable
xvYCC color on the AV controller with this setting.
Disable: xvYCC color disabled.
Enable: xvYCC color enabled.
■ Control
This function allows CEC-compatible components or
RIHD-compatible components connected via HDMI to
be controlled with the AV controller.
Disable: HDMI Control disabled.
Enable: HDMI Control enabled.
Notes:
• HDMI control works only with the HDMI OUT
MAIN jack, not the HDMI OUT SUB jack.
• Select Disable if a connected component is incompatible or you’re not sure about its compatibility.
• If operation is unreliable when set to Enable, select
Disable instead.
• When the HDMI Audio Out setting is set to On, or TV
Control is set to Enable and you’re listening through
your TV’s speakers (see page 37), if you turn up the
AV controller’s volume control, the sound will be output by the AV controller’s speakers. To stop the AV
controller’s speakers producing sound, change the settings, change your TV’s settings, or turn down the AV
controller’s volume.
Power Control

To link the power functions of CEC-compatible components or RIHD-compatible components connected via
HDMI, select Enable.
Disable: Power Control disabled.
Enable: Power Control enabled.
Notes:
• The Power Control setting can be set only when the
above Control setting is set to Enable.

107

PR-SC885_En.book Page 108 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued
• HDMI power control only works with HDMI-compatible components that support it and may not work
properly with some components due to their settings
or compatibility.
• When set to Enable, the AV controller consumes more
power.
• When set to Enable, the AV controller enters Ready
mode when set to Standby. Also, the AV controller’s
AC outlets will be on all of the time regardless of
whether the AV controller is set to On or Standby, or
Ready mode in this case.
TV Control

Select Enable to control the AV controller from an
RIHD-compatible TV connected via HDMI.
Disable: TV Control disabled.
Enable: TV Control enabled.
Notes:
• Select Disable if your TV is incompatible or you’re
note sure about its compatibility.
• The TV Control setting can be set only when the above
Control and Power Control settings are both set to
Enable.
Note:
• After changing the Control, Power Control, or TV
Control setting, be sure to turn all of your components off and then back on again. Refer to the
instruction manuals for your other components.

Network
These settings are for use with home automation equipment and external controllers.

Lock Setup
Lock
With this setting, you can protect your settings by locking the setup menus.
Locked: Setup menus locked.
Unlocked: Setup menus unlocked.
When Locked is selected, only this Lock Setup item can
be accessed.

108

PR-SC885_En.book Page 109 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Zone 2 and Zone 3
In addition to your main listening room, you can also enjoy playback in two other rooms, or as we call them, Zone 2
and Zone 3. And, you can select a different source for each room.

Zone 2 Video Outputs

Connecting Zone 2
Zone 2 speakers must be connected to an amp in Zone 2.

Connecting Your Zone 2 Speakers
You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 2 and
a different source to those selected for your main room
and Zone 3.
Hookup
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV controller’s ZONE 2 PRE OUT L/R jacks to an analog audio
input on your Zone 2 amp.
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV controller’s ZONE 2 PRE OUT SW jack to the line input on
a powered subwoofer in Zone 2.
• Connect your Zone 2 speakers to the speaker terminals on your Zone 2 amp.

The AV controller features a composite video output and
component video output for connection to a TV in
Zone 2, so you can enjoy both audio and video in that
zone.
Hookup
• Use a composite video cable to connect the AV controller’s ZONE 2 OUT V jack to a composite video
input on your Zone 2 TV.
• Alternatively, use a component video cable to connect
the AV controller’s COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT jacks to a component
video input on your Zone 2 TV.
Main room
TV

Main room
AV controller

Multichannel power amp
MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT

ZONE 2
OUT

AV controller
ZONE 2

ZONE 3

Zone 2
TV

PRE OUT

Zone 2

LINE INPUT
IN

Powered
subwoofer

Receiver/
integrated amp

Note:
• With the default settings, the Zone 2 volume must be
set on the Zone 2 amp. If your Zone 2 amp has no volume control, set the Zone 2 Out setting to Variable so
that you can set the Zone 2 volume on the AV controller (see page 110).

• If you use the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR
OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT, you must set the Monitor Out2
setting to Zone 2 (see page 45).
Notes:
• The ZONE 2 OUT V jack outputs video from components connected to composite video inputs and
S-Video inputs.
• The COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR
OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT outputs video from components
connected to component video inputs.

109

PR-SC885_En.book Page 110 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
Connecting Zone 3

Zone 2/Zone 3 Out Settings

Zone 3 speakers must be connected to an amp in Zone 3.

Connecting Your Zone 3 Speakers
You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 3 and
a different source to those selected for your main room
and Zone 2.
Hookup
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV controller’s ZONE 3 PRE OUT L/R jacks to an analog audio
input on your Zone 3 amp.
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV controller’s ZONE 3 PRE OUT SW jack to the line input on
a powered subwoofer in Zone 3.
• Connect your Zone 3 speakers to the speaker terminals on your Zone 3 amp.

If you’ve connected your Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers to
an amp with no volume control, set the Zone 2 Out or
Zone 3 Out setting, respectively, to Variable so that you
can set the zone’s volume, balance, and tone on the AV
controller.

1
RECEIVER

TUP

Main room

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

ENTER

Multichannel power amp

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Hardware Setup menu appears.

ENTER

AV controller

ZONE 3

ENTER
R

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “2. Zone 2/
Zone 3,” and then press [ENTER].
The Zone 2/Zone 3 screen appears.

PRE OUT

7-2.Zone2/Zone3
Zone2 Out
Zone3 Out

Zone 3

Fixed
Fixed

ENTER

LINE INPUT
IN

Powered
subwoofer

Receiver/
integrated amp

4
ENTER

Note:
• With the default settings, the Zone 3 volume must be
set on the Zone 3 amp. If your Zone 3 amp has no volume control, set the Zone 3 Out setting to Variable so
that you can set the Zone 3 volume on the AV controller (see page 110).

110

ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Zone 2 Out” or
“Zone 3 Out,” and use the Left
and Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to
select:
Fixed: The Zone 2 or Zone 3 volume
must be set on the amp in that
zone.
Variable: The Zone 2 or Zone 3 volume can be set on the AV controller.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 111 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued

Selecting an Input Source for Zones

Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
SE

TUP

On the remote controller, press
the [ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3]
REMOTE MODE button.

Remote
controller
ZONE3

Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV controller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.

On the AV controller, press the
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button.

ZONE2

AV controller
ZONE 2

Using Zone 2 and Zone 3

The ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 indicator
flashes, and the input selector currently
selected for the zone appears on the display.

This section explains how to use Zone 2 and Zone 3.
ZONE 3

ZONE3
ZONE2
TONE

On the remote controller, use the
INPUT SELECTOR buttons.

Remote
controller
MASTER VOLUME

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TAPE

TUNER

STANDBY/ON

STANDBY
ZONE 2
ZONE 3

PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 2

AUX 1

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

ZONE 2
PHONES

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

STEREO

TUNING

THX

POWER

RT/PTY/TP MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

RETURN

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

PHONO

SETUP
PRESET

CLEAR

OFF

DIGITAL INPUT

ZONE 3

LISTENING MODE

S VIDEO

ENTER

TUNING

VIDEO

L AUDIO R

DIGITAL

+10

OFF
AV controller

ZONE 2

STANDBY

DVD

VCR/DVR

ON
INPUT
SELECTOR

On the AV controller, use the
input selector buttons, or press
the [ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button
repeatedly
The input source is selected, the zone is
turned on, the name of the input selector appears on the display, and the
ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 indicator lights
continuously.

INPUT
CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

CLEAR

PHONO

D. TUN

+10

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

ZONE 3

TV VOL

MACRO

ZONE3

ZONE2

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

CD
CDR/MD

CABLE

DOCK

SAT

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

SLEEP
P
TO

U
MEN

MEN
U

+
CH

PREV
CH

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

ID E

TUP

XI T

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

REC

MUTING

PLAYLIST

MUTING

RANDOM

LISTENING MODE
STEREO

SURR

REPEAT

AUDIO

PURE A

DIRECT

THX

ALL ST

TEST TONE

CH SEL

LEVEL-

LEVEL+

AUDIO SEL

L NIGHT

Re-EQ

VCR

DVD

HDD

Notes:
• To select AM, FM, SIRIUS, or XM, press the
[TUNER] input selector button repeatedly.
• Only analog input sources are output by Zone 2 and
Zone 3. Digital input sources are not output. If no
sound is heard when an input source is selected, check
to make sure it’s connected to an analog input.
• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is on, the Auto Power On/
Standby and Direct Change
functions do not
work.
• You cannot select different AM or FM radio stations
for your main room, Zone 2, and Zone 3. The same
AM/FM radio station will be heard in each room.
However, you can select different AM/FM, SIRIUS,
or XM stations. For example, XM for your main room,
SIRIUS for Zone 2, and AM/FM for Zone 3.

SUBTITLE PLAY MODE

OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF

LEVEL–,
LEVEL+

RC-690M

111

PR-SC885_En.book Page 112 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
Turning Off Zones

Remote
controller

On the remote controller, press
the [ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3]
REMOTE MODE button.

Adjusting the Balance of Zones

1
AV controller

On the AV controller, press the
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button.

ZONE 2

ZONE3

On the AV controller, press the
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button.

ZONE2

AV controller

ZONE 3

The ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 indicator
flashes.

ZONE 2

TONE

Press the AV controller’s [TONE]
button repeatedly to select Balance.

ZONE 3

2
Remote
controller
STANDBY

On the remote controller, press
the [STANDBY] button.
On the AV controller, press the
[OFF] button.

AV controller

The zone is turned off, and the ZONE 2
or ZONE 3 indicator goes off.

OFF

Adjusting the Volume of Zones
Remote
controller
ZONE3
ZONE2

LEVEL

AV controller
ZONE 2

ZONE 3

112

On the remote controller, press
the [ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3]
REMOTE MODE button, and then
use the [LEVEL–] and [LEVEL+]
buttons.
On the AV controller, press the
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button,
press the [LEVEL] button, and
then use the Up [ ] and Down
[ ] buttons.

Use the Up [ ] and Down [ ]
buttons to adjust the balance.
You can adjust the balance from 0 in the
center to +10 dB to the right or +10 dB
to the left in 2 dB steps.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 113 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
Muting Zones
ZONE3
ZONE2

MUTING

On the remote controller, press
the [ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3]
REMOTE MODE button, and then
press the [MUTING] button.
To unmute a zone, on the remote
controller, press the [ZONE 2] or
[ZONE 3] REMOTE MODE button,
and then press the [MUTING] button again.

Adjusting the Tone of Zone 2

1
AV controller

On the AV controller, press the
[ZONE 2] button.

ZONE 2

TONE

Press the AV controller’s [TONE]
button repeatedly to select Bass
or Treble.

Use the Up [ ] and Down [ ]
buttons to adjust the bass or treble.
You can boost or cut the Bass or Treble
from –10 dB to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.

Notes:
• Zones can also be unmuted by adjusting the volume.
• The tone cannot be adjusted for Zone 3.
• The Zone 2 level, balance, and tone functions have no
effect on the ZONE 2 PRE OUT when the Zone 2 Out
setting is set to Fixed (page 110).
• The Zone 3 level and balance functions have no effect
on the ZONE 3 PRE OUT when the Zone 3 Out setting is set to Fixed (page 110).

113

PR-SC885_En.book Page 114 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
Using the 12V Triggers

The 12V triggers A, B, and C can be used to turn on 12V
trigger-capable components automatically when they are
selected as the input source. The triggers can be set so
that they activate when a connected component is
selected as the input source for the main room, Zone 2,
Zone 3, or any combination of rooms.
When triggered, the output from a 12V TRIGGER OUT
goes high (+12 volts, 100 milliamperes max).

ENTER

6-x.12V Trigger x Setup

ENTER

12V TRIGGER OUT

IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR

IN 2

MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT

OUT
MAIN

IN 1

OUT
SUB

HD RADIO

ANTENNA
AM

SIRIUS

ETHERNET
FM75

OUT 1

Y
V

REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

DVD

MONITOR
OUT V

CB/PB

IR
A
IN

ZONE 2
OUT

ANTENNA

FM
75
ZONE 2

COAXIAL
(DVD)

IN 2

(VCR/DVR)

OUT

FRONT

OUT

CENTER

SURR

A
SURR BACK

B
FRONT

SW
CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK

AC 120V 60Hz
SWITCHED
120W 1A MAX.

(CBL/SAT)

ZONE 3

CR/PR

L
IN 3

AC OUTLET

12V TRIGGER OUT

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1

OPTICAL

PHONO

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

GND

BALANCE R

TAPE
BALANCE L
MONO

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

SURR R

VCR/DVR
FRONT R

SUBWOOFER

DVD
CENTER

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH

FRONT L

SURR L

PRE OUT

SURR BACK L
Bi-AMP

PRE OUT

ENTER

SUBWOOFER

IN 2
(CD)

GND

2
3

OUT
HOT

COLD

HOT

COLD

INPUT

PRE OUT

Hookup
• Use a miniplug cable to connect the AV controller’s
12V TRIGGER OUT A, B, or C jack to the 12 V trigger input on a connected component.
When several components are turned on simultaneously
by using triggers A, B, and C, depending on the type of
components, a large amount of current may be drawn
momentarily. To prevent this, you can delay trigger signals A, B, and C individually. Another application for
trigger delay is eliminating the “thump” noise that’s
sometimes heard when a source component is turned on.
Delaying the trigger signal for your power amplifier so
that it’s the last component to be turned on will accomplish this.

1
RECEIVER

ENTER

6.Miscellaneous

ENTER

114

5
ENTER

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select
“6. Miscellaneous,” and then
press [ENTER].
The Miscellaneous menu appears.
1.Volume Setup
2.OSD Setup
3.12V Trigger A
4.12V Trigger B
5.12V Trigger C

Setup
Setup
Setup

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Delay,” and use
the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select: 0 sec, 1 sec, 2 sec,
or 3 sec.
When 0 sec is selected, the trigger signal is output as soon as the input source
is changed.

ENTER

TUP

1sec
Main/Zone2
Main/Zone2
Main/Zone2
Main/Zone2
Main/Zone2
Main/Zone2
Main/Zone2
Main/Zone2
Main/Zone2
Main/Zone2

AC INLET

IN 2

COMPONENT VIDEO

Delay
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
TV/GAME
AUX1
AUX2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO

HDMI
ASSIGNABLE

IN 4

RS232

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “12V Trigger A,
B, or C,” and then press [ENTER].
The 12V Trigger A/B/C Setup screen
appears.

6
SE

TUP

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an input source,
and use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select an
option.
Off: No trigger signal is output.
A 12-volt trigger signal is output when
the connected component is selected as
the source for:
Main: Main room.
Zone2: Zone 2.
Main/Z2:Main room or Zone 2.
Zone3: Zone 3.
Main/Z3:Main room or Zone 3.
Z2/Z3: Zone 2 or Zone 3.
Main/Z2/Z3:Main room, Zone 2, or
Zone 3.
When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
Setup closes.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 115 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
Using the Remote Controller in
Zone 2/3 and Multiroom Control Kits
To control the AV controller with the remote controller
while you’re in Zone 2 or Zone 3, you’ll need a commercially available multiroom remote control kit for each
zone.
• Multiroom kits are made by Niles and Xantech.
These kits can also be used when there isn’t a clear line
of sight to the AV controller’s remote sensor, such as
when it’s installed inside a cabinet.

Using a Multiroom Kit with a Cabinet
In this setup, the IR receiver picks up the infrared signals
from the remote controller and feeds them to the AV controller located in the cabinet via the connecting block.

IR Receiver
Connecting
block

IR IN
A or B

Using a Multiroom Kit with Zone 2/3
In this setup, the IR receiver in Zone 2/3 picks up the
infrared signals from the remote controller and feeds
them through to the AV controller in the main room via
the connecting block.

Inside
cabinet

Remote controller

Signal flow

Using a Multiroom Kit with Other
Components

IR IN
A or B

IR Receiver

Connecting
block

Remote controller

Main room

In this setup, an IR emitter is connected to the AV controller’s IR OUT jack and placed in front of the other
component’s remote control sensor. Infrared signals
received at the AV controller’s IR IN A or B jack are fed
through to the other component via the IR emitter. Signals picked up by the AV controller’s remote control sensor are not output.

Zone 2/3

Signal flow

The miniplug cable from the connecting block should be
connected to the AV controller’s IR IN A or B jack, as
shown below. The IR IN A and B jacks are identical. Up
to two IR receivers can be connected.

IR Receiver

Connecting
block

IR IN
A or B
IR OUT

AV controller
IR Emitter

Remote controller

From the connecting block
Other component
Miniplug cable
Signal flow
IR
A
IN

The IR emitter should be connected to the AV controller’s IR OUT jack, as shown below.

OUT

AV controller

Miniplug cable
Other component
Remote control
sensor
Emitter

IR
A
IN

Miniplug
IR Emitter
OUT

AV controller
Signal flow

115

PR-SC885_En.book Page 116 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Controlling Other Components
You can control your other components, including those
made by other manufacturers, with the remote controller.
This section explains how to:
• Enter the remote control code for a component that
you want to control: DVD, TV, VCR, etc.
• Learn commands directly from another component’s
remote controller (see page 119).
• Program the MACRO buttons to perform a sequence
of up to eight remote control actions (see page 120).

While holding down the REMOTE
MODE button to which you want
to enter the code, press the
[STANDBY] button.
The Remote indicator lights up.

REMOTE MODE
VCR

DVD
CD

CDR/MD
CABLE

DOCK

SAT

STANDBY

Entering Remote Control Codes
To control another component, you must first enter that
component’s remote control code to a REMOTE MODE
button. You’ll need to enter a code for each component
that you want to control.
Remote
indicator

STANDBY

3
DVD

VCR/DVR

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TAPE

TUNER

TV
INPUT

Number
buttons

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

CLEAR

PHONO

D. TUN

+10

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

TV VOL

MACRO

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE

REMOTE
MODE

DVD

VCR

ZONE2

CDR/MD
TV

CABLE

DOCK

SAT

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

RECEIVER

SLEEP
P
TO

U
MEN

MEN
U

+
CH

PREV
CH

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

ID E

TUP

E XI

MUTING

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

LISTENING MODE
STEREO

SURR

REPEAT

AUDIO

PURE A

DIRECT

THX

ALL ST

TEST TONE

CH SEL

LEVEL-

LEVEL+

AUDIO SEL

L NIGHT

Re-EQ

VCR

DVD

HDD

RC-690M

116

Notes:
• Remote control codes cannot be entered for the
[RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE button.
• The remote control codes provided are correct at the
time of printing but subject to change.

SUBTITLE PLAY MODE

OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF

Press the REMOTE MODE button
again to select the remote controller mode, point the remote
controller at the component, and
check the operation.
If the remote controller doesn’t work as
expected, and several remote codes are
listed, try each one in turn and use the
one that works best.

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

REC

TV I

DVD

GAME/TV

CBL/SAT

Within 30 seconds, use the number buttons to enter the 4-digit
remote control code.
The Remote indicator flashes twice.

Look up the component’s remote
control code in the separate
Remote Control Codes list.
The codes are organized by category.

• The DOCK remote mode can only be used with
the Onkyo RI Dock at this time.
• The [DVD] and [CD] REMOTE MODE buttons
are preprogrammed for use with Onkyo DVD
players and CD players, respectively.
• To control another manufacturer’s CD recorder or
MD recorder, enter the appropriate remote control
code to the [CD] REMOTE MODE button.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 117 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Controlling Other Components—Continued
Remote Control Codes for Onkyo
Components Connected via

Resetting the Remote Mode Buttons

Onkyo components that are connected via
are controlled by pointing the remote controller at the AV controller, not the component. This allows you to control
components that are out of view, in a rack, for example.

You can reset a REMOTE MODE button to its default
remote control code.

1
REMOTE MODE
DVD

Make sure the Onkyo component is connected with an
cable and an analog
audio cable (RCA).
See page 42 for details.

VCR

CDR/MD
CABLE

DOCK

SAT

Enter the appropriate remote control code
to the REMOTE MODE button.
• [DVD] REMOTE MODE button
5002: Onkyo DVD player with

• [CD] REMOTE MODE button
6002: Onkyo CD player with

REMOTE MODE
DVD

• [MD] REMOTE MODE button
6008: Onkyo MD recorder with

VCR

CDR/MD
CABLE

DOCK

SAT

• [CDR] REMOTE MODE button
6006: Onkyo CD recorder with
• [DOCK] REMOTE MODE button
6004: Onkyo DS-A1 RI Dock with
See the previous page for how to enter remote
control codes.

While holding down the REMOTE
MODE button that you want to
reset, press the TV [
] button.
The Remote indicator flashes three
times.

Press the REMOTE MODE button, point
the remote controller at the AV controller,
and operate the component.

Press the REMOTE MODE button
again.
The Remote indicator flashes twice,
indicating that the button has been
reset.
The [DVD] and [CD] REMOTE
MODE buttons are preprogrammed
with remote control codes for controlling Onkyo DVD players and CD players, respectively. When these buttons
are reset, the preprogrammed codes are
restored.

Resetting the Remote Controller
You can reset the remote controller to its default settings.

If you want to control an Onkyo component by pointing
the remote controller directly at it, or you want to control
an Onkyo component that’s not connected via
, use
the following remote control codes:
• [DVD] REMOTE MODE button
5001: Onkyo DVD player without

1
RECEIVER

While holding down the
[RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE button, press the [STANDBY] button.
The Remote indicator flashes five
times.

(default)
STANDBY

• [CD] REMOTE MODE button
6001: Onkyo CD player without

(default)

• [MD] REMOTE MODE button
6007: Onkyo MD recorder without

• [CDR] REMOTE MODE button
6005: Onkyo CD recorder without
• [DOCK] REMOTE MODE button
6003: Onkyo DS-A2 RI Dock without

RECEIVER

(default)

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button again.
The Remote indicator flashes twice,
indicating that the remote controller
has been reset.

Note:
• If you connect an
-capable Onkyo MiniDisc or CD
recorder to the TAPE IN/OUT jacks, for remote operation to work properly, you must set the Input Display
to MD or CDR, respectively (see page 49).

117

PR-SC885_En.book Page 118 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Controlling Other Components—Continued
To control another component, point the remote controller at it and use the buttons explained below. (You must select
the appropriate remote controller mode with the REMOTE MODE buttons first.) With some components, certain buttons
may not work as expected, and some may not work at all.
■ Controlling a TV

■ Controlling a VCR
Press [VCR] first

Press [TV] first

STANDBY

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

AUX1

TV
INPUT

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

CLEAR

GAME/TV

PHONO

D. TUN

+10

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

TV VOL

STANDBY

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

CLEAR

GAME/TV

ZONE3

CABLE

ZONE2

VCR

CABLE

RECEIVER

MEN

PREV
CH

ID E

TUP

9
4

VOL

ENTER

E XI

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

MUTING

PLAYLIST

8
7

AUX1

INPUT

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

CLEAR

GAME/TV

VCR

RECEIVER

CABLE

PREV
CH

ID E

TUP

E XI

RANDOM

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

MUTING

REC

PLAYLIST

ZONE2

RANDOM

DOCK

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

VOL

ENTER

ZONE3

SAT

+
CH
DISC
ALBUM

MACRO

CDR/MD

DOCK

MEN

TV VOL

D. TUN

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

TAPE/AMP

U
MEN

REMOTE MODE

SLEEP
P
TO

9
9

8
4

MEN

U
MEN

+
CH

PREV
CH

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

5
8

SLEEP
P
TO

E XI

ID E

RN
RE T U

TUP

DISPLAY

MUTING

REC

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

LISTENING MODE

STEREO

SURR

REPEAT

AUDIO

PURE A

DIRECT

THX

ALL ST

TEST TONE

CH SEL

LEVEL-

LEVEL+

SUBTITLE PLAY MODE

OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
AUDIO SEL

L NIGHT

Re-EQ

VCR

DVD

HDD

A [ON], [STANDBY], TV [

SURR

REPEAT

AUDIO

PURE A

DIRECT

THX

ALL ST

TEST TONE

CH SEL

LEVEL-

LEVEL+

SUBTITLE PLAY MODE

OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF

STEREO

SURR

REPEAT

AUDIO

PURE A

DIRECT

THX

ALL ST

TEST TONE

CH SEL

LEVEL-

LEVEL+

L NIGHT

Re-EQ

AUDIO SEL

L NIGHT

Re-EQ

VCR

DVD

HDD

VCR

DVD

HDD

A [ON], [STANDBY]
Set the VCR to On or Standby.

B Number buttons

Enter numbers.

Select channels on the TV.

D [PREV CH]
Selects the previous channel.

E [TV INPUT]*
Selects the TV’s external inputs.

F TV VOL [ ]/[ ]*
Adjust the TV’s volume.

G [MUTING]
Mutes the TV.

H [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[MENU]/
[ENTER]/[RETURN]
Navigate menus on the TV.

C [CLEAR]
Cancels functions.

D [CH +/–]
Selects channels on the VCR.

E [PREV CH]
Selects the previous channel.

F REC [ ]
Starts recording.

G Eject [ ]
Ejects the videocassette.

H [ ], [ ], [ ], [

], [ ]
Play, Pause, Stop, Rewind, and
Fast forward.

I [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[MENU]/
*Buttons marked with an asterisk (*)
are exclusively for controlling a TV
and can be used at any time, regardless of the currently selected remote
controller mode.

SUBTITLE PLAY MODE

AUDIO SEL

B Number buttons
C [CH +/–], TV CH [+]/[–]*

OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF

RC-690M

Set the TV to On or Standby.

8
6

LISTENING MODE

STEREO

RC-690M

118

DVD

8
REC

ZONE2

DIMMER

+
CH
DISC
ALBUM

U
MEN

CBL/SAT

PHONO

ZONE3

SAT

SLEEP
P
TO

VCR/DVR

+10

DVD

TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

STANDBY

CDR/MD

DOCK

SAT

TV VOL

DVD

REMOTE MODE

CD
CDR/MD

MACRO

REMOTE MODE
VCR

D. TUN

+10

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

Press [CABLE] (SAT) first

TV
INPUT

PHONO

DVD

MACRO

DVD

■ Controlling a Satellite or
Cable Receiver

[ENTER]/[RETURN]
Navigate menus on the VCR.

RC-690M

A [ON], [STANDBY]
Set the satellite/cable receiver to
On or Standby.

B Number buttons
Enter numbers.

C [CLEAR]
Cancels functions.

D [CH +/–]
Selects satellite/cable channels.

E [PREV CH]
Selects the previous channel.

F [GUIDE]
Displays the program guide.

G [

], [ ]
Rewind and Fast forward.

H [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[MENU]/
[ENTER]/[RETURN]
Navigate menus on the satellite/cable receiver.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 119 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Controlling Other Components—Continued
Learning Commands

If the command is learned successfully,
the Remote indicator flashes twice.
EV

ST E
TEON
T
L
SE
H
C
T

C
IS

D
C

D
PO

-1
EO
VID

EE
SL

D
C
O
N

ER E
LE R
N PR
SE E
TU
T UN
PU T
IN
P
U
PE
O
R
TA
G
VD
D
-2
EO
VID
P

R O
TO H
C P

BY
I

T
PU
IN

V
C

T
V

UN
D.T R
A 12
CLE

VO
L

CABLE

CDR/MD

VCR

DVD

REMOTE MODE

ID E

TUP

DISPLAY

VOL

ENTER

PREV
CH

MEN

+
CH

X1
AU

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP

DISC
ALBUM

DOCK

SAT

U
MEN

ZONE2

DIMMER
P
TO

R/D

ZONE3

CABLE

VCR

CDR/MD
TV

REMOTE MODE

1, 4

MACRO

DVD

E/T

TV VOL

CLEAR

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

RC-690M

To learn more commands, repeat
steps 2 and 3.
Press any REMOTE MODE button
when you’ve finished.

D. TUN

+10

TUNER

IVER P
CE
RE /AM EP
PE LE
S
TA

TAPE

PHONO

2
NE
ZO

CK
DO

+
TV CH

3
NE
ZO

3
AUX2

ER
W

CH
TI- T
UL PU
M IN

CBL/SAT

2
AUX1

E
D
O
M
D

VCR/DVR

O
EM
R

DVD

GAME/TV

RE
SUOD
M

D
DV

INPUT

0 11 TOR
7
C
O
LE
ON
E O
S
PH
10 UT CR
A
-- INP M 2

STANDBY

About 2 to 6
inches (5–15 cm)

Remote
indicator

TIN

The AV controller’s remote controller can learn the commands of other remote controllers. By transmitting, for
example, the Play command from your CD player’s
remote controller, the remote controller can learn it, and
then transmit the exact same command when its Play [ ]
button is pressed in the CD remote mode.
This is useful when you’ve entered the appropriate remote
control code (page 116) but some buttons don’t work as
expected.

E XI

RN
RE T U
MUTING

While holding down the REMOTE
MODE button for the mode in
which you want to use the command, press the [ON] button.
The Remote indicator lights up.

DOCK

SAT
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

Press the button you want to
learn the new command.

Point the remote controllers at
each other, about 2 to 6 inches
(5–15 cm) apart, and then press
and hold the button whose command you want to learn until the
Remote indicator flashes.

Notes:
• The following buttons cannot learn new commands:
REMOTE MODE, MACRO [1], [2], [3], TV CH [+]/[–
], Re-EQ, LIGHT.
• When you want to learn the command from your TV’s
Power button, select the TV remote control mode and
use the remote controller’s [STANDBY] button to learn
the command. In the TV remote control mode, the
remote controller’s [STANDBY] and TV [
] buttons are linked, so using the [STANDBY] button to
learn the command will mean that you can also use the
TV [
] button to turn your TV on or off in TV
remote control mode.
• When you want to learn the commands from your TV’s
Channel Up and Down buttons, select the TV remote
control mode and use the remote controller’s CH [+/–]
button (left to the [ENTER] button) to learn the commands. In the TV remote control mode, the remote controller’s CH [+/–] and TV CH [+]/[–] buttons are linked,
so using the CH [+/–] button to learn these commands
will mean that you can also use the TV CH [+]/[–] buttons to change channels in TV remote control mode.
• The remote controller can learn approximately 70 to 90
commands, although this will be less if commands that
use a lot of memory are learned.
• Remote controller buttons such as Play, Stop, Pause,
and so on are preprogrammed with commands for controlling Onkyo CD players, cassette decks, and DVD
players. However, they can learn new commands, and
you can restore the preprogrammed commands at any
time by resetting the remote controller (see page 117).
• To overwrite a previously learned command, repeat this
procedure.
• Only commands from infrared remote controllers can
be learned.
• When the remote controller’s batteries expire, all
learned commands will be lost and will have to be
learned all over again, so don’t discard your other
remote controllers.

119

PR-SC885_En.book Page 120 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Controlling Other Components—Continued
Using Macros
You can program the remote controller’s MACRO buttons to perform a sequence of remote control actions.
Example:
To play a CD you typically need to perform the following actions:
1. Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE button
to select the RECEIVER remote controller mode.
2. Press the [ON] button to turn on the AV controller.
3. Press the [CD] INPUT SELECTOR button to
select the CD input source.
4. Press the [CD] REMOTE MODE button to select
the CD remote controller mode.
5. Press the Play [ ] button to start playback on the
CD player.
You can program a MACRO button so that all five
actions are performed with just one button press.

Making Macros

Press the buttons whose actions
you want to program into the
macro in the order you want them
performed.
For the CD example in the left column,
you’d press the following buttons:
[ON], [CD] INPUT SELECTOR, [CD]
REMOTE MODE, Play [ ].

When you’ve finished, press the
MACRO button again.
The Remote indicator flashes twice.
If you enter eight commands, the process will finish automatically.

Note:
• If any of the buttons you used to make a macro are
taught new commands, the macro will no longer work
properly and will have to be made again.

Running Macros

Each MACRO button can store one macro, and each
macro can contain up to eight commands.

Press the MACRO [1], [2], or [3]
button.
The commands in the macro are transmitted in the order in which they were
programmed. Keep the remote controller pointed at the AV controller until all
of the commands have been transmitted.
Macros can be run at any time, regardless of the current remote controller
mode.

Remote
indicator
ON

STANDBY

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TV
INPUT

TAPE

TUNER

CLEAR

PHONO

D. TUN

+10

MACRO
1, 2, 3

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

TV VOL

MACRO

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD

REMOTE
MODE

ZONE2

VCR

CDR/MD
TV

CABLE

DOCK

SAT

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

RECEIVER

SLEEP
P
TO

U
MEN

ME N

Deleting Macros

+
CH
DISC
ALBUM

ENTER

VOL

1
1
REMOTE MODE
DVD
CD

VCR
TV

CDR/MD
CABLE
SAT

DOCK

While holding down the REMOTE
MODE button of the remote controller mode you want to use at
the start of the macro, press
MACRO button [1], [2], or [3].
The Remote indicator lights up.

RECEIVER

While holding down the
[RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE button, press the MACRO button
whose macro you want to delete.

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

120

For the CD example in the left column,
you’d press and hold the [RECEIVER]
REMOTE MODE button, and then
press MACRO button [1], [2], or [3].

Press the MACRO button again.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 121 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Troubleshooting
If you have any trouble using the AV controller, look for
a solution in this section. If you can’t resolve the issue
yourself, contact the dealer from whom you purchased
this unit.
If you can’t resolve the issue yourself, try resetting
the AV controller before contacting the dealer from
whom you purchased this unit.
To reset the AV controller to its factory defaults,
turn it on and, while holding down the [VCR/DVR]
button, press the [STANDBY/ON] button. “Clear”
will appear on the display and the AV controller
will enter Standby mode.
STANDBY/ON

VCR/DVR

Note that resetting the AV controller will delete your
radio presets and custom settings.

Power
Can’t turn on the AV controller
• Make sure that the power cord is plugged into the wall
outlet properly.
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, wait 5
seconds or more, then plug it back in again.

Audio
There’s no sound or it’s very quiet
• Make sure that your multichannel power amplifier is
turned on and set up correctly and connected to the AV
controller properly (page 19).
• Make sure that the digital input is assigned to the input
selector (page 49).
• Make sure that the correct audio input is selected
(page 78).
• Make sure that all audio connecting plugs are pushed
in all the way (page 26).
• Make sure that the polarity of the speaker cables is
correct, and that the bare wire is in contact with the
metal part of each speaker terminal.
• Make sure that the speaker cables are not shorting.
• Check the volume (page 57). The AV controller is
designed for home theater enjoyment and has a wide
volume range for precise adjustment.
• If the MUTING indicator is flashing on the display,
press the remote controller’s [MUTING] button to
unmute the AV controller (page 76).
• While a pair of headphones is connected to the
PHONES jack, no sound is output by the main room
speakers (page 77).
• Check the digital audio output settings on the source
component. On some game consoles, such as those
that can play DVDs, the default setting is off.
• With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an
audio format from a menu or with the AUDIO button
on your DVD player’s remote controller.

• If your turntable uses an MC cartridge, you must use
an MC head amp or MC transformer (page 39).
• Check the speaker settings (pages 94–99).
• If the digital signal format is set to PCM or DTS, set it
to Auto (page 78).
• If there’s no sound from a DVD player connected to an
HDMI IN, check the DVD player’s output settings,
and be sure to select a compatible audio format.
Only the front speakers produce sound
• When the Stereo listening mode is selected, only the
front speakers and subwoofer produce sound.
• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers
output sound if the Output Speaker setting is set to L/R
(page 91).
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 94).
Only the center speaker produces sound
• If you use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie or Dolby
Pro Logic IIx Music listening mode with a mono
source, such as an AM radio station or mono TV program, the sound will be concentrated in the center
speaker.
• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers
output sound if the Output Speaker setting is set to C
(page 91).
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 94).
The surround speakers produce no sound
• When the Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected,
the surround speakers produce no sound.
• Depending on the source and the current listening
mode, not much sound may be produced by the surround speakers. Try another listening mode (page 79).
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 94).
The center speaker produces no sound
• When the Stereo listening mode is selected, the center
speaker produces no sound.
• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers
output sound if the Output Speaker setting is set to L/R
(page 91).
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 94).
The surround back speakers produce no sound
• The surround back speakers are not used with all listening modes. Try another listening mode (page 79).
• Not much sound may be produced by the surround
back speakers with some sources.
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 94).
The subwoofer produces no sound
• If the source material contains no audio in the LFE
channel, the subwoofer produces no sound.
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 94).
The Zone 2/3 speakers produce no sound
• The Zone 2/3 speakers only output sources that are
connected to an analog input. Check to see if the
source component is connected to an analog input.

121

PR-SC885_En.book Page 122 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Troubleshooting—Continued
There’s no sound with a certain signal format
• Check the digital audio output setting on the source
component. On some game consoles, such as those
that can play DVDs, the default setting is off.
• With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an
audio format from a menu or with the AUDIO button
on your DVD player’s remote controller.
Can’t select the Pure Audio listening mode
• The Pure Audio listening mode cannot be selected
while Zone 2 is on.
The volume cannot be set to +18 dB (99)
• Check to see if a maximum volume has been set
(page 104).
• After the Automatic Speaker Setup function has been
run, or the volume level of each individual speaker has
been adjusted (pages 76 and 98), the maximum volume may be reduced.
Noise can be heard
• Using cable ties to bundle audio cables with power
cords, speaker cables, and so on can degrade audio
performance, so don’t use them.
• An audio cable may be picking up interference. Try
repositioning your cables.
The Late Night function doesn’t work
• Make sure that the source is Dolby Digital (page 89).
The analog multichannel input doesn’t work
• Check the multichannel input connections (page 31).
• Make sure that the multichannel input is assigned to
the input selector (page 51).
• Make sure that the multichannel input is selected
(page 78).
• Check the audio output settings on your DVD player.
About DTS signals
• When playing DTS program material, using the pause,
fast forward, or fast reverse function on your player
may produce a short audible noise. This is not a malfunction.
• When DTS program material ends and the DTS bitstream stops, the AV controller remains in DTS listening mode and the DTS indicator remains on. This is to
prevent noise when you use the pause, fast forward, or
fast reverse function on your player. If you switch your
player from DTS to PCM, as the AV controller does
not switch formats immediately, you may not hear
anything, in which case you should stop your player
for about 3 seconds, and then resume playback.
• With some CD players, you won’t be able to playback
DTS material properly even though your player is connected to a digital input on the AV controller. This is
usually because the DTS bitstream has been processed
(e.g., output level, sampling rate, or frequency response
changed) and the AV controller doesn’t recognize it as a
genuine DTS signal. In such cases, you may hear noise.
The beginning of audio received by an HDMI IN
can’t be heard
• Since it takes longer to identify the format of an
HDMI signal than it does for other digital audio signals, sound may not be output immediately.

122

Video
There’s no picture
• Make sure that all video connecting plugs are pushed
in all the way (page 26).
• Make sure that each video component is properly connected.
• On your TV, make sure that the video input to which
the AV controller is connected is selected.
• While the Pure Audio listening mode is selected, the
video circuitry is turned off and only the HDMI outputs output video signals.
• If your TV is connected to an HDMI output, set the
HDMI Monitor setting to Main or Sub (page 45), and
select “- - -” in the “HDMI Input Setup” on page 47 to
watch composite video, S-Video, and component
video sources.
• If your TV is connected to the COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT 1 or COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT, set the HDMI Monitor
setting to No (page 45), and select “- - -” in the “Component Video Input Setup” on page 48 to watch composite video and S-Video sources.
• If the video source is connected to a component video
input, your TV must be connected to the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1, COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT, HDMI
OUT MAIN, or HDMI OUT SUB (page 27).
• If the video source is connected to an HDMI input,
your TV must be connected to the HDMI OUT MAIN
or HDMI OUT SUB (page 27).
There’s no picture from a source connected to
an HDMI IN
• When the HDMI Monitor setting is set to No, and the
Resolution setting is set to anything other than
Through (see page 45), no video is output by the
HDMI OUT.
• If the message “Resolution Error” appears on the AV
controller’s display, this indicates that your TV does
not support the current video resolution and you need
to select another resolution on your DVD player.
The onscreen menus don’t appear
• On your TV, make sure that the video input to which
the AV controller is connected is selected.

Tuner
Reception is noisy, stereo FM reception suffers
from hiss, or the FM STEREO indicator doesn’t
light up
• Relocate your antenna.
• Move the AV controller away from your TV or computer.
• Listen to the station in mono (page 58).
• When listening to an AM station, operating the remote
controller may cause noise.
• Passing cars and airplanes can cause interference.
• Concrete walls weaken radio signals.
• If nothing improves the reception, install an outdoor
antenna.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 123 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Troubleshooting—Continued
Remote Controller
The remote controller doesn’t work
• Make sure that the batteries are installed with the correct polarity (page 13).
• Make sure that the remote controller is not too far
away from the AV controller and there’s no obstruction between the remote controller and the AV controller’s remote control sensor (page 13).
• Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote controller mode (page 14).
• Make sure you’ve entered the correct remote control
code (page 116).
Can’t control other components
• Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote controller mode (page 14).
• If you’ve connected an
-capable Onkyo MD
recorder, CD recorder, or RI Dock to the TAPE
IN/OUT jacks, or an RI Dock to the GAME/TV IN
jacks, for the remote controller to work properly, you
must set the Input Display to MD, CDR, or DOCK,
respectively (see page 49).
• The entered remote control code may not be correct. If
more than one code is listed, try each one.
• If none of the codes work, use the Learning function
to learn the commands of the other component’s
remote controller (page 119).
• With some AV components, certain buttons may not
work as expected, and some may not work at all.
• To control an Onkyo component that’s connected via
, point the remote controller at the AV controller.
Be sure to enter the appropriate remote control code
first (page 117).
• To control an Onkyo component that’s not connected
via
, or another manufacturer’s component, point
the remote controller at that component. Be sure to enter
the appropriate remote control code first (page 116).
Can’t learn commands from another remote
controller
• When learning commands, make sure that the transmitting ends of both remote controllers are pointing at
each other.
• Are you trying to learn from a remote controller that
cannot be used for learning? Some commands cannot
be learned, especially those that contain several
instructions.

Others
The sound changes when I connect my headphones
• When a pair of headphones is connected, the listening
mode is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo,
Mono, or Direct, in which case it stays the same.
How do I change the language of a multiplex
source
• On the Audio Adjust menu, change the Multiplex setting to Main or Sub (page 92).
The
functions don’t work
• To use
, you must make an
connection and an
analog audio connection (RCA) between the component and AV controller, even if they are connected digitally (page 42).
• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is selected, the
functions
don’t work.
The AV controller’s display doesn’t work
• The display is turned off when the Pure Audio listening mode is selected. Select another listening mode.
Components connected to the AV controller’s
AC outlets don’t turn on or off when the AV controller is set to On or Standby
• When the HDMI Control setting is set to Enable
(page 107), the AC outlets are on all the time regardless of whether the AV controller is set to On or
Standby, or Ready mode in this case, so any components connected to them cannot be turned on or off
automatically.

The AV controller contains a microcomputer for signal
processing and control functions. In very rare situations,
severe interference, noise from an external source, or
static electricity may cause it to lockup. In the unlikely
event that this happens, unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet, wait at least 5 seconds, and then plug it back
in again.
Onkyo is not responsible for damages (such as CD
rental fees) due to unsuccessful recordings caused by
this unit’s malfunction. Before you record important
data, make sure that the material will be recorded correctly.

Recording
Can’t record
• On your recorder, make sure the correct input is
selected.
• To prevent signal loops and damage to the AV controller, input signals are not fed through to outputs with
the same name (e.g., TAPE IN to TAPE OUT or
VCR/DVR IN to VCR/DVR OUT).
• When the Pure Audio listening mode is selected, video
recording is not possible because no video signals are
output. Select another listening mode.

Set the AV controller to Standby before disconnecting
the power cord from the wall outlet.

123

PR-SC885_En.book Page 124 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Specifications
Amplifier Section

General

THD (Total Harmonic
Distortion)
Input Sensitivity and
Impedance

Power Supply
Power Consumption:
Dimensions
(W × H × D)

Output Level and
Impedance
Phono Overload
Frequency Response
Tone Control
Signal to Noise Ratio

0.05% (1 Vrms)
200 mV/ 47 kΩ (LINE)
2.5 mV/47 kΩ (PHONO MM)
200 mV/ 470 Ω (REC OUT)
70 mV (MM 1 kHz, 0.5%)
5 Hz–100 kHz/ +1 dB–3 dB (Direct mode)
±10 dB, 20 Hz (BASS)
±10 dB, 20 kHz (TREBLE)
110 dB (LINE, IHF-A)
80 dB (PHONO, IHF-A)

Weight

HDMI
Component
Composite
S-Video

Analog Inputs

■ FM
Tuning Frequency Range
Balance Inputs
Multichannel Inputs

COAXIAL IN 1, IN 2, IN 3,
OPTICAL IN 1, IN 2, IN 3 (Front)
PHONO, CD, TAPE, AUX 1, GAME/TV,
CBL/SAT, VCR/DVR, DVD, MULTI CH
(FRONT, CENTER, SUBWOOFER,
SURR, SURR BACK), AUX 2
BALANCE L, BALANCE R
7.1 ch

■ Audio Outputs

Tuning Frequency Range
530 kHz–1710 kHz

■ Digital Tuner

Digital Output
Analog Outputs

XM, SIRIUS, HD RADIO
Preset Channel

OUT (MAIN), OUT (SUB)
MONITOR OUT 1, MONITOR OUT 2
VCR/DVR OUT, MONITOR OUT
VCR/DVR OUT, MONITOR OUT

■ Audio Inputs
Digital Inputs

■ AM

IN 1, IN 2, IN 3, IN 4
IN 1 (DVD), IN 2, IN 3
AUX 1, GAME/TV, CBL/SAT,
VCR/DVR, DVD, AUX 2
AUX 1, GAME/TV, CBL/SAT,
VCR/DVR, DVD, AUX 2

■ Video Output

Tuner Section

87.5 MHz– 107.9 MHz

435 × 194 × 448.5 mm
17-1/8" × 7-5/8"× 17-11/16"
13.5 kg
29.8 lbs.

■ Video Input

Video Section
Input Sensitivity/Output
Level and Impedance
1 Vp-p /75Ω (Component and S-Video Y)
0.7 Vp-p /75Ω (Component Pb/Cb,Pr/Cr)
0.28 Vp-p /75Ω (S-Video C)
1 Vp-p /75Ω (Composite)
Component Video
Frequency Response
5 Hz – 100 MHz, –3 dB

AC 120 V, 60 Hz
1.1 A

OPTICAL (OUT)
TAPE, VCR/DVR, PRE OUT (FRONT,
CENTER, SUBWOOFER, SURR, SURR
BACK, ZONE 2, ZONE 3)
FL, FR, C, SL, SR, SBL, SBR, SW

Balance Pre Outputs
Multichannel Pre
Outputs
7
Subwoofer Pre Outputs 1
Speaker Outputs
HDMI MAIN (FL, FR, C, SL, SR, SBL,
SBR, + ZONE 2 (L, R)
Phones
PHONES

■ Control Terminal
MIC

Yes

RS232
Ethernet
IR Input/Output
12 V Trigger Out

1
1
2/1
3

Specifications and features are subject to change without
notice.

124

PR-SC885_En.book Page 125 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Memo

125

PR-SC885_En.book Page 126 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Memo

126

PR-SC885_En.book Page 127 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Memo

127

PR-SC885_En.book Page 128 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Sales & Product Planning Div. : 2-1, Nisshin-cho, Neyagawa-shi, OSAKA 572-8540, JAPAN
Tel: 072-831-8023 Fax: 072-831-8124
ONKYO U.S.A. CORPORATION
18 Park Way, Upper Saddle River, N.J. 07458, U.S.A.
Tel: 201-785-2600 Fax: 201-785-2650 http://www.us.onkyo.com/
ONKYO EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH
Liegnitzerstrasse 6, 82194 Groebenzell, GERMANY
Tel: +49-8142-4401-0 Fax: +49-8142-4401-555 http://www.eu.onkyo.com/
ONKYO EUROPE UK Office
Suite 1, Gregories Court, Gregories Road, Beaconsfield, Buckinghamshire, HP9 1HQ
UNITED KINGDOM Tel: +44-(0)1494-681515 Fax: +44(0)-1494-680452
ONKYO CHINA LIMITED
Unit 1&12, 9/F, Ever Gain PlazaTower 1, 88, Container Port Road, Kwai Chung,
N.T., HONG KONG Tel: 852-2429-3118 Fax: 852-2428-9039
http://www.ch.onkyo.com/

HOMEPAGE
http://www.onkyo.com/

I0802-2

* 2 9 3 4 4 4 6 3 A *

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : Yes
Modify Date                     : 2008:02:26 14:25:38+09:00
Create Date                     : 2008:02:26 14:07:53Z
Page Count                      : 128
Creation Date                   : 2008:02:26 14:07:53Z
Mod Date                        : 2008:02:26 14:25:38+09:00
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 5.0.5 for Macintosh
Author                          : Onkyo
Metadata Date                   : 2008:02:26 14:25:38+09:00
Creator                         : Onkyo
Title                           : PR-SC885_En
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Onkyo Pr Sc885 Users Manual SC885_En

Onkyo-Pr-Sc885P-Owner-S-Manual onkyo-pr-sc885p-owner-s-manual

Onkyo-Pr-Sc885-Owner-S-Manual onkyo-pr-sc885-owner-s-manual

PR-SC885 to the manual 94b04901-b199-434b-8436-e1cbc815a8ff

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation